Support size relocation only for ELF
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011,
5 @c 2012, 2013
6 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
7 @syncodeindex ky cp
8 @c man begin INCLUDE
9 @include configdoc.texi
10 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
11 @include bfdver.texi
12 @c man end
13
14 @c @smallbook
15
16 @macro gcctabopt{body}
17 @code{\body\}
18 @end macro
19
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @ifset man
22 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
23 @set UsesEnvVars
24 @set GENERIC
25 @set ARM
26 @set C6X
27 @set H8300
28 @set HPPA
29 @set I960
30 @set M68HC11
31 @set M68K
32 @set MMIX
33 @set MSP430
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
59 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2012, 2013
60 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61
62 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
63 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
64 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
67 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
68 @end copying
69 @iftex
70 @finalout
71 @setchapternewpage odd
72 @settitle The GNU linker
73 @titlepage
74 @title The GNU linker
75 @sp 1
76 @subtitle @code{ld}
77 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79 @end ifset
80 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81 @author Steve Chamberlain
82 @author Ian Lance Taylor
83 @page
84
85 @tex
86 {\parskip=0pt
87 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
89 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
90 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91 }
92 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93 @end tex
94
95 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
96 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
97 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
98 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009,
99 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
100
101 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
102 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
103 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
104 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
105 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
106 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
107 @c man end
108
109 @end titlepage
110 @end iftex
111 @contents
112 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
113
114 @ifnottex
115 @node Top
116 @top LD
117 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
118 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
119 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
120 @end ifset
121 version @value{VERSION}.
122
123 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
124 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
125 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
126
127 @menu
128 * Overview:: Overview
129 * Invocation:: Invocation
130 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
131 @ifset GENERIC
132 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
133 @end ifset
134 @ifclear GENERIC
135 @ifset H8300
136 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset Renesas
139 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset I960
142 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset ARM
145 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68HC11
148 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset HPPA
151 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset M68K
154 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC
157 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset POWERPC64
160 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command Line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command Line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifset I960
382 @cindex architectures
383 @kindex -A @var{arch}
384 @item -A @var{architecture}
385 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
386 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
387 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
388 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
389 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
390 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
391 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
392 family}, for details.
393
394 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
395 other architecture families.
396 @end ifset
397
398 @ifclear SingleFormat
399 @cindex binary input format
400 @kindex -b @var{format}
401 @kindex --format=@var{format}
402 @cindex input format
403 @cindex input format
404 @item -b @var{input-format}
405 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
406 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
407 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
408 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
409 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
410 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
411 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
412 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
413 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
414 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
415 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
416 @xref{BFD}.
417
418 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
419 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
420 linking object files of different formats), by including
421 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
422 particular format.
423
424 The default format is taken from the environment variable
425 @code{GNUTARGET}.
426 @ifset UsesEnvVars
427 @xref{Environment}.
428 @end ifset
429 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
430 @code{TARGET};
431 @ifclear man
432 see @ref{Format Commands}.
433 @end ifclear
434 @end ifclear
435
436 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
438 @cindex compatibility, MRI
439 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
440 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
441 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
442 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
443 @ifclear man
444 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
445 @end ifclear
446 @ifset man
447 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
448 @end ifset
449 Introduce MRI script files with
450 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
451 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
452 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
453 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
454
455 @cindex common allocation
456 @kindex -d
457 @kindex -dc
458 @kindex -dp
459 @item -d
460 @itemx -dc
461 @itemx -dp
462 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
463 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
464 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
465 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
466 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
467
468 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
471 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
472 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
473 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
474 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
475 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
476 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
477 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
478
479 @cindex entry point, from command line
480 @kindex -e @var{entry}
481 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
482 @item -e @var{entry}
483 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
484 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
485 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
486 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
487 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
488 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
489 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
490 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
491
492 @kindex --exclude-libs
493 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
494 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
495 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
496 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
497 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
498 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
499 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
500 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
501 be treated as hidden.
502
503 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
504 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
505 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
506 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
507 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
508 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
509 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
510 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
511 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
512 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
513 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
514 regardless of this option.
515
516 @cindex dynamic symbol table
517 @kindex -E
518 @kindex --export-dynamic
519 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
520 @item -E
521 @itemx --export-dynamic
522 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
523 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
524 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
525 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
526 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
527
528 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
529 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
530 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
531 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
532
533 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
534 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
535 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
536 linking the program itself.
537
538 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
539 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
540 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
541
542 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
543 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
544 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
545
546 @ifclear SingleFormat
547 @cindex big-endian objects
548 @cindex endianness
549 @kindex -EB
550 @item -EB
551 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
552
553 @cindex little-endian objects
554 @kindex -EL
555 @item -EL
556 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
557 @end ifclear
558
559 @kindex -f @var{name}
560 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
561 @item -f @var{name}
562 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
563 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
564 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
565 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
566 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
567
568 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
569 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
570 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
571 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
572 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
573 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
574 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
575 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
576 machine specific performance.
577
578 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
579 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
580
581 @kindex -F @var{name}
582 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
583 @item -F @var{name}
584 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
585 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
586 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
587 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
588 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
589
590 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
591 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
592 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
593 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
594 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
595 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
596 @var{name}.
597
598 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
599 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
600 object files.
601 @ifclear SingleFormat
602 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
603 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
604 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
605 environment variable.
606 @end ifclear
607 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
608 creating an ELF shared object.
609
610 @cindex finalization function
611 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
612 @item -fini=@var{name}
613 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
614 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
615 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
616 the function to call.
617
618 @kindex -g
619 @item -g
620 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
621
622 @kindex -G @var{value}
623 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
624 @cindex object size
625 @item -G @var{value}
626 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
627 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
628 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
629 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
630 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
631
632 @cindex runtime library name
633 @kindex -h @var{name}
634 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
635 @item -h @var{name}
636 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
637 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
638 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
639 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
640 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
641 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
642
643 @kindex -i
644 @cindex incremental link
645 @item -i
646 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
647
648 @cindex initialization function
649 @kindex -init=@var{name}
650 @item -init=@var{name}
651 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
652 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
653 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
654 function to call.
655
656 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
657 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
658 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
659 @item -l @var{namespec}
660 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
661 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
662 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
663 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
664 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
665 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
666
667 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
668 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
669 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
670 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
671 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
672 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
673 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
674 @var{filename}.
675
676 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
677 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
678 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
679 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
680 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
681 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
682
683 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
684 archives multiple times.
685
686 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
687
688 @ifset GENERIC
689 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
690 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
691 behaviour of the AIX linker.
692 @end ifset
693
694 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
695 @kindex -L @var{dir}
696 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
697 @item -L @var{searchdir}
698 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
699 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
700 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
701 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
702 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
703 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
704 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
705 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
706 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
707 option is specified.
708
709 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
710 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex -q
832 @kindex --emit-relocs
833 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
834 @item -q
835 @itemx --emit-relocs
836 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
837 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
838 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
839 in larger executables.
840
841 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
842
843 @kindex --force-dynamic
844 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
845 @item --force-dynamic
846 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
847 to VxWorks targets.
848
849 @cindex partial link
850 @cindex relocatable output
851 @kindex -r
852 @kindex --relocatable
853 @item -r
854 @itemx --relocatable
855 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
856 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
857 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
858 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
859 @code{OMAGIC}.
860 @c ; see @option{-N}.
861 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
862 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
863 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
864
865 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
866 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
867 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
868 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
869 with input files in other formats at all.
870
871 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
872
873 @kindex -R @var{file}
874 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
875 @cindex symbol-only input
876 @item -R @var{filename}
877 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
878 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
879 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
880 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
881 programs. You may use this option more than once.
882
883 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
884 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
885 the @option{-rpath} option.
886
887 @kindex -s
888 @kindex --strip-all
889 @cindex strip all symbols
890 @item -s
891 @itemx --strip-all
892 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
893
894 @kindex -S
895 @kindex --strip-debug
896 @cindex strip debugger symbols
897 @item -S
898 @itemx --strip-debug
899 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
900
901 @kindex -t
902 @kindex --trace
903 @cindex input files, displaying
904 @item -t
905 @itemx --trace
906 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
907
908 @kindex -T @var{script}
909 @kindex --script=@var{script}
910 @cindex script files
911 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
912 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
913 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
914 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
915 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
916 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
917 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
918 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
919 options accumulate.
920
921 @kindex -dT @var{script}
922 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
923 @cindex script files
924 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
925 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
926 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
927
928 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
929 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
930 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
931 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
932 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
933 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
934 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
935 @samp{gcc}).
936
937 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
938 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
939 @cindex undefined symbol
940 @item -u @var{symbol}
941 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
942 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
943 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
944 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
945 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
946 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
947
948 @kindex -Ur
949 @cindex constructors
950 @item -Ur
951 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
952 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
953 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
954 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
955 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
956 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
957 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
958 @samp{-r} for the others.
959
960 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
961 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
962 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
963 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
964 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
965 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
966 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
967 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
968 in a linker script.
969
970 @kindex -v
971 @kindex -V
972 @kindex --version
973 @cindex version
974 @item -v
975 @itemx --version
976 @itemx -V
977 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
978 lists the supported emulations.
979
980 @kindex -x
981 @kindex --discard-all
982 @cindex deleting local symbols
983 @item -x
984 @itemx --discard-all
985 Delete all local symbols.
986
987 @kindex -X
988 @kindex --discard-locals
989 @cindex local symbols, deleting
990 @item -X
991 @itemx --discard-locals
992 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
993 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
994 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
995
996 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
997 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998 @cindex symbol tracing
999 @item -y @var{symbol}
1000 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1001 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1002 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1003 to prepend an underscore.
1004
1005 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1006 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1007
1008 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1009 @item -Y @var{path}
1010 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1011 for Solaris compatibility.
1012
1013 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1014 @item -z @var{keyword}
1015 The recognized keywords are:
1016 @table @samp
1017
1018 @item combreloc
1019 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1020 lookup caching possible.
1021
1022 @item defs
1023 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1024 shared libraries are still allowed.
1025
1026 @item execstack
1027 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1028
1029 @item global
1030 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1031 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1032 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1033
1034 @item initfirst
1035 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1036 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1037 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1038 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1039 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1040 objects.
1041
1042 @item interpose
1043 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1044 but the primary executable.
1045
1046 @item lazy
1047 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1048 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1049 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1050 Lazy binding is the default.
1051
1052 @item loadfltr
1053 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1054 runtime.
1055
1056 @item muldefs
1057 Allows multiple definitions.
1058
1059 @item nocombreloc
1060 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1061
1062 @item nocopyreloc
1063 Disables production of copy relocs.
1064
1065 @item nodefaultlib
1066 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1067 ignore any default library search paths.
1068
1069 @item nodelete
1070 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1071
1072 @item nodlopen
1073 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1074
1075 @item nodump
1076 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1077
1078 @item noexecstack
1079 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1080
1081 @item norelro
1082 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1083
1084 @item now
1085 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1086 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1087 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1088 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1089 first called.
1090
1091 @item origin
1092 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1093
1094 @item relro
1095 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1096
1097 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1098 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1099
1100 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1101 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1102
1103 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1104 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1105 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1106 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1107
1108 @end table
1109
1110 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1111
1112 @kindex -(
1113 @cindex groups of archives
1114 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1115 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1116 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1117 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1118
1119 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1120 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1121 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1122 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1123 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1124 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1125 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1126 resolved.
1127
1128 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1129 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1130 more archives.
1131
1132 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1133 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1134 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1135 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1136 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1137 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1138 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1139 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1140 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1141 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1142 restore the old behaviour.
1143
1144 @kindex --as-needed
1145 @kindex --no-as-needed
1146 @item --as-needed
1147 @itemx --no-as-needed
1148 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1149 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1150 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1151 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1152 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1153 emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1154 from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1155 DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1156 undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1157 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1158
1159 @kindex --add-needed
1160 @kindex --no-add-needed
1161 @item --add-needed
1162 @itemx --no-add-needed
1163 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1164 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1165 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1166 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1167
1168 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1169 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1170 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1171
1172 @kindex -Bdynamic
1173 @kindex -dy
1174 @kindex -call_shared
1175 @item -Bdynamic
1176 @itemx -dy
1177 @itemx -call_shared
1178 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1179 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1180 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1181 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1182 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1183 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1184
1185 @kindex -Bgroup
1186 @item -Bgroup
1187 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1188 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1189 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1190 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1191 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1192
1193 @kindex -Bstatic
1194 @kindex -dn
1195 @kindex -non_shared
1196 @kindex -static
1197 @item -Bstatic
1198 @itemx -dn
1199 @itemx -non_shared
1200 @itemx -static
1201 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1202 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1203 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1204 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1205 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1206 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1207 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1208 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1209 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1210 libraries.
1211
1212 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1213 @item -Bsymbolic
1214 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1215 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1216 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1217 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1218 platforms which support shared libraries.
1219
1220 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1221 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1222 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1223 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1224 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1225 libraries.
1226
1227 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1228 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1230 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1231 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1232 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1233 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1234 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1235 which support shared libraries.
1236
1237 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1238 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1239
1240 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1241 @item --dynamic-list-data
1242 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1243
1244 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1245 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1247 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1248
1249 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1250 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1252
1253 @kindex --check-sections
1254 @kindex --no-check-sections
1255 @item --check-sections
1256 @itemx --no-check-sections
1257 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1258 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1259 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1260 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1261 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1262 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1263 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1264 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1265 option.
1266
1267 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1269 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1271 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1272 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1273 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1274 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1275 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1276 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1277 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1278 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1279
1280 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1281 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1282 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1283 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1284 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1285 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1286 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1287 symbols.
1288
1289 @cindex cross reference table
1290 @kindex --cref
1291 @item --cref
1292 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1293 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1294 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1295
1296 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1297 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1298 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1299 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1300 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1301
1302 @cindex common allocation
1303 @kindex --no-define-common
1304 @item --no-define-common
1305 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1306 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1307 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1308
1309 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1310 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1311 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1312 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1313 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1314 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1315 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1316 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1317 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1318 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1319
1320 @cindex symbols, from command line
1321 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1322 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1323 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1324 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1325 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1326 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1327 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1328 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1329 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1330 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1331 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1332 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1333 @var{expression}.
1334
1335 @cindex demangling, from command line
1336 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1337 @kindex --no-demangle
1338 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1339 @itemx --no-demangle
1340 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1341 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1342 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1343 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1344 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1345 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1346 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1347 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1348 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1349
1350 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1351 @kindex -I@var{file}
1352 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1353 @item -I@var{file}
1354 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1355 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1356 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1357 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1358 doing.
1359
1360 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1361 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1362 @item --fatal-warnings
1363 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1364 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1365 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1366
1367 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1368 @item --force-exe-suffix
1369 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1370
1371 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1372 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1373 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1374 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1375 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1376 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1377
1378 @kindex --gc-sections
1379 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1380 @cindex garbage collection
1381 @item --gc-sections
1382 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1383 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1384 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1385 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1386 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1387
1388 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1389 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1390 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1391 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1392 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1393 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1394 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1395 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1396 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1397
1398 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1399 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1400 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1401 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1402
1403 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1404 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1405 @cindex garbage collection
1406 @item --print-gc-sections
1407 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1408 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1409 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1410 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1411 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1412 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1413 line.
1414
1415 @kindex --print-output-format
1416 @cindex output format
1417 @item --print-output-format
1418 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1419 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1420 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1421
1422 @cindex help
1423 @cindex usage
1424 @kindex --help
1425 @item --help
1426 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1427
1428 @kindex --target-help
1429 @item --target-help
1430 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1431
1432 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1433 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1434 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1435 @option{-M} option, above.
1436
1437 @cindex memory usage
1438 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1439 @item --no-keep-memory
1440 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1441 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1442 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1443 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1444 while linking a large executable.
1445
1446 @kindex --no-undefined
1447 @kindex -z defs
1448 @item --no-undefined
1449 @itemx -z defs
1450 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1451 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1452 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1453 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1454 libraries being linked in.
1455
1456 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1457 @kindex -z muldefs
1458 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1459 @itemx -z muldefs
1460 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1461 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1462 first definition will be used.
1463
1464 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1465 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1466 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1467 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1468 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1469 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1470 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1471 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1472 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1473
1474 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1475 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1476 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1477 a shared library.
1478
1479 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1480 libraries specified at link time are that:
1481
1482 @itemize @bullet
1483 @item
1484 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1485 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1486 resolvable at load time.
1487 @item
1488 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1489 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1490
1491 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1492 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1493 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1494 appropriate memset function.
1495 @end itemize
1496
1497 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1498 @item --no-undefined-version
1499 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1500 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1501 will be issued instead.
1502
1503 @kindex --default-symver
1504 @item --default-symver
1505 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1506 exported symbols.
1507
1508 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1509 @item --default-imported-symver
1510 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1511 imported symbols.
1512
1513 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1514 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1515 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1516 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1517 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1518 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1519 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1520 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1521 inappropriate.
1522
1523 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1524 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1525 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1526 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1527
1528 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1529 @item --no-whole-archive
1530 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1531 archive files.
1532
1533 @cindex output file after errors
1534 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1535 @item --noinhibit-exec
1536 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1537 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1538 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1539 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1540
1541 @kindex -nostdlib
1542 @item -nostdlib
1543 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1544 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1545 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1546
1547 @ifclear SingleFormat
1548 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1549 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1550 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1551 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1552 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1553 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1554 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1555 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1556 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1557 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1558 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1559 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1560 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1561 @end ifclear
1562
1563 @kindex -pie
1564 @kindex --pic-executable
1565 @item -pie
1566 @itemx --pic-executable
1567 @cindex position independent executables
1568 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1569 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1570 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1571 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1572 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1573 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1574
1575 @kindex -qmagic
1576 @item -qmagic
1577 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1578
1579 @kindex -Qy
1580 @item -Qy
1581 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1582
1583 @kindex --relax
1584 @cindex synthesizing linker
1585 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1586 @cindex --no-relax
1587 @item --relax
1588 @itemx --no-relax
1589 An option with machine dependent effects.
1590 @ifset GENERIC
1591 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1592 @end ifset
1593 @ifset H8300
1594 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1595 @end ifset
1596 @ifset I960
1597 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1598 @end ifset
1599 @ifset XTENSA
1600 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1601 @end ifset
1602 @ifset M68HC11
1603 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1604 @end ifset
1605 @ifset POWERPC
1606 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1607 @end ifset
1608
1609 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1610 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1611 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1612 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1613 instructions, and combining constant values.
1614
1615 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1616 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1617 @ifset GENERIC
1618 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1619 family of processors.
1620 @end ifset
1621
1622 @ifset GENERIC
1623 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1624 but ignored.
1625 @end ifset
1626
1627 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1628 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1629
1630 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1631 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1632 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1633 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1634 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1635 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1636 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1637 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1638 @ifset GENERIC
1639 (such as VxWorks)
1640 @end ifset
1641 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1642 run-time memory.
1643
1644 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1645 or symbols needed for relocations.
1646
1647 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1648 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1649
1650 @ifset GENERIC
1651 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1652 @cindex runtime library search path
1653 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1654 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1655 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1656 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1657 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1658 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1659 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1660 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1661 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1662 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1663
1664 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1665 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1666 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1667 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1668 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1669 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1670 file systems.
1671
1672 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1673 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1674 the @option{-rpath} option.
1675 @end ifset
1676
1677 @ifset GENERIC
1678 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1679 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1680 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1681 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1682 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1683 of the input files.
1684
1685 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1686 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1687 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1688 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1689 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1690 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1691 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1692 appearing multiple times.
1693
1694 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1695 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1696 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1697 runtime linker would do.
1698
1699 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1700 libraries:
1701 @enumerate
1702 @item
1703 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1704 @item
1705 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1706 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1707 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1708 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1709 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1710 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1711 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1712 @item
1713 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1714 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1715 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1716 @item
1717 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1718 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1719 @item
1720 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1721 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1722 @item
1723 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1724 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1725 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1726 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1727 @item
1728 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1729 @item
1730 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1731 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1732 @end enumerate
1733
1734 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1735 warning and continue with the link.
1736 @end ifset
1737
1738 @kindex -shared
1739 @kindex -Bshareable
1740 @item -shared
1741 @itemx -Bshareable
1742 @cindex shared libraries
1743 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1744 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1745 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1746 undefined symbols in the link.
1747
1748 @kindex --sort-common
1749 @item --sort-common
1750 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1751 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1752 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1753 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1754 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1755 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1756 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1757 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1758
1759 @kindex --sort-section=name
1760 @item --sort-section=name
1761 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1762 patterns in the linker script.
1763
1764 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1765 @item --sort-section=alignment
1766 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1767 patterns in the linker script.
1768
1769 @kindex --split-by-file
1770 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1771 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1772 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1773 size of 1 if not given.
1774
1775 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1776 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1777 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1778 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1779 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1780 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1781 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1782 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1783 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1784 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1785 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1786 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1787
1788 @kindex --stats
1789 @item --stats
1790 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1791 as execution time and memory usage.
1792
1793 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1794 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1795 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1796 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1797 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1798
1799 @kindex --traditional-format
1800 @cindex traditional format
1801 @item --traditional-format
1802 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1803 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1804 use the traditional format instead.
1805
1806 @cindex dbx
1807 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1808 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1809 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1810 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1811 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1812 combine duplicate entries.
1813
1814 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1815 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1816 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1817 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1818 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1819 line.
1820 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1821 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1822 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1823 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1824 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1825
1826 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1827 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1828 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1829 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1830 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1831 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1832 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1833 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1834 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1835
1836 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1837 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1838 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1839 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1840 of the first byte of the text segment.
1841
1842 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1843 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1844 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1845 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1846 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1847 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1848
1849 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1850 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1851 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1852 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1853 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1854
1855 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1856 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1857 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1858 values for @samp{method}:
1859
1860 @table @samp
1861 @item ignore-all
1862 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1863
1864 @item report-all
1865 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1866
1867 @item ignore-in-object-files
1868 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1869 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1870
1871 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1872 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1873 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1874 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1875 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1876 command line.
1877 @end table
1878
1879 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1880 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1881
1882 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1883 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1884 can change this to a warning.
1885
1886 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1887 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1888 @item --dll-verbose
1889 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1890 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1891 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1892 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1893 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1894
1895 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1896 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1897 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1898 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1899 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1900 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1901 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1902 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1903 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1904 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1905 @xref{WIN32}.
1906
1907 @kindex --warn-common
1908 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1909 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1910 @item --warn-common
1911 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1912 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1913 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1914 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1915 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1916 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1917
1918 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1919
1920 @table @samp
1921 @item int i = 1;
1922 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1923 file.
1924
1925 @item extern int i;
1926 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1927 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1928 variable somewhere.
1929
1930 @item int i;
1931 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1932 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1933 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1934 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1935 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1936 a definition of the same variable.
1937 @end table
1938
1939 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1940 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1941 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1942 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1943 a common symbol.
1944
1945 @enumerate
1946 @item
1947 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1948 definition for the symbol.
1949 @smallexample
1950 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1951 overridden by definition
1952 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1953 @end smallexample
1954
1955 @item
1956 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1957 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1958 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1959 @smallexample
1960 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1961 overriding common
1962 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1963 @end smallexample
1964
1965 @item
1966 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1967 @smallexample
1968 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1969 of `@var{symbol}'
1970 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1971 @end smallexample
1972
1973 @item
1974 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1975 @smallexample
1976 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1977 overridden by larger common
1978 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1979 @end smallexample
1980
1981 @item
1982 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1983 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1984 encountered in a different order.
1985 @smallexample
1986 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1987 overriding smaller common
1988 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1989 @end smallexample
1990 @end enumerate
1991
1992 @kindex --warn-constructors
1993 @item --warn-constructors
1994 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1995 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1996 detect the use of global constructors.
1997
1998 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1999 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2000 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2001 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2002 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2003 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2004 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2005 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2006 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2007 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2008 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2009 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2010 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2011
2012 @kindex --warn-once
2013 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2014 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2015 @item --warn-once
2016 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2017 which refers to it.
2018
2019 @kindex --warn-section-align
2020 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2021 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2022 @item --warn-section-align
2023 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2024 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2025 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2026 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2027 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2028
2029 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2030 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2031 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2032
2033 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2034 @item --warn-alternate-em
2035 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2036
2037 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2038 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2039 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2040 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2041 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2042
2043 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2044 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2045 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2046 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2047
2048 @kindex --whole-archive
2049 @cindex including an entire archive
2050 @item --whole-archive
2051 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2052 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2053 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2054 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2055 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2056 library. This option may be used more than once.
2057
2058 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2059 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2060 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2061 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2062 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2063
2064 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2065 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2066 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2067 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2068 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2069 @var{symbol}.
2070
2071 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2072 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2073 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2074 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2075
2076 Here is a trivial example:
2077
2078 @smallexample
2079 void *
2080 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2081 @{
2082 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2083 return __real_malloc (c);
2084 @}
2085 @end smallexample
2086
2087 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2088 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2089 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2090 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2091
2092 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2093 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2094 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2095 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2096 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2097
2098 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2099 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2100 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2101 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2102
2103 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2104 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2105 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2106 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2107 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2108
2109 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2110 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2111 @item --enable-new-dtags
2112 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2113 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2114 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2115 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2116 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2117 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2118 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2119
2120 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2121 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2122 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2123 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2124 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2125 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2126 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2127
2128 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2129 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2130 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2131 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2132 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2133 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2134 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2135
2136 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2137 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2138 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2139 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2140 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2141 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2142
2143 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2144 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2145 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2146 has been used.
2147
2148 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2149 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2150
2151 @kindex --build-id
2152 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2153 @item --build-id
2154 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2155 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2156 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2157 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2158 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2159 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2160 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2161 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2162 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2163 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2164 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2165
2166 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2167 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2168 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2169 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2170 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2171 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2172
2173 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2174 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2175 @end table
2176
2177 @c man end
2178
2179 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2180
2181 @c man begin OPTIONS
2182
2183 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2184 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2185 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2186 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2187 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2188 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2189 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2190 object file).
2191
2192 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2193 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2194 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2195 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2196
2197 @table @gcctabopt
2198
2199 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2200 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2201 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2202 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2203 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2204
2205 @kindex --base-file
2206 @item --base-file @var{file}
2207 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2208 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2209 @file{dlltool}.
2210 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2211
2212 @kindex --dll
2213 @item --dll
2214 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2215 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2216 file.
2217 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2218
2219 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2220 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2221 @item --enable-long-section-names
2222 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2223 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2224 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2225 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2226 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2227 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2228 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2229 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2230 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2231 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2232 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2233 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2234 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2235 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2236 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2237 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2238 image and not stripping symbols.
2239 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2240
2241 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2242 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2243 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2244 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2245 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2246 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2247 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2248 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2249 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2250 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2251 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2252 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2253 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2254 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2255 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2256 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2257 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2258 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2259
2260 @kindex --leading-underscore
2261 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2262 @item --leading-underscore
2263 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2264 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2265 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2266 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2267
2268 @cindex DLLs, creating
2269 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2270 @item --export-all-symbols
2271 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2272 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2273 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2274 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2275 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2276 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2277 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2278 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2279 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2280 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2281 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2282 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2283 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2284 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2285 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2286 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2287 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2288 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2289 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2290 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2291 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2292 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2293 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2294
2295 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2296 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2297 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2298 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2299 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2300
2301 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2302 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2303 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2304 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2305
2306 @kindex --file-alignment
2307 @item --file-alignment
2308 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2309 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2310 512.
2311 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2312
2313 @cindex heap size
2314 @kindex --heap
2315 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2316 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2317 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2318 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2319 committed.
2320 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2321
2322 @cindex image base
2323 @kindex --image-base
2324 @item --image-base @var{value}
2325 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2326 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2327 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2328 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2329 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2330 for dlls.
2331 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2332
2333 @kindex --kill-at
2334 @item --kill-at
2335 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2336 symbols before they are exported.
2337 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2338
2339 @kindex --large-address-aware
2340 @item --large-address-aware
2341 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2342 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2343 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2344 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2345 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2346 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2347
2348 @kindex --major-image-version
2349 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2350 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2351 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2352
2353 @kindex --major-os-version
2354 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2355 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2356 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2357
2358 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2359 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2360 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2361 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2362
2363 @kindex --minor-image-version
2364 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2365 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2366 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2367
2368 @kindex --minor-os-version
2369 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2370 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2371 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2372
2373 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2374 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2375 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2376 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2377
2378 @cindex DEF files, creating
2379 @cindex DLLs, creating
2380 @kindex --output-def
2381 @item --output-def @var{file}
2382 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2383 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2384 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2385 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2386 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2387 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2388
2389 @cindex DLLs, creating
2390 @kindex --out-implib
2391 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2392 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2393 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2394 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2395 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2396 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2397 creation step.
2398 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2399
2400 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2401 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2402 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2403 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2404 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2405 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2406 avoided.
2407 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2408
2409 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2410 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2411 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2412 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2413 default.
2414 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2415
2416 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2417 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2418 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2419 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2420 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2421 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2422 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2423 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2424 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2425 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2426
2427 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2428 @item --enable-auto-import
2429 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2430 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2431 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2432 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2433 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2434 specification published by Microsoft.
2435
2436 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2437 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2438 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2439 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2440 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2441
2442 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2443 see this message:
2444
2445 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2446 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2447
2448 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2449 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2450 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2451 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2452 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2453 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2454 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2455 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2456 the warning, and exit.
2457
2458 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2459 data type of the exported variable:
2460
2461 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2462 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2463 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2464
2465 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2466 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2467 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2468 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2469
2470 @example
2471 extern type extern_array[];
2472 extern_array[1] -->
2473 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2474 @end example
2475
2476 or
2477
2478 @example
2479 extern type extern_array[];
2480 extern_array[1] -->
2481 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2482 @end example
2483
2484 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2485 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2486
2487 @example
2488 extern struct s extern_struct;
2489 extern_struct.field -->
2490 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2491 @end example
2492
2493 or
2494
2495 @example
2496 extern long long extern_ll;
2497 extern_ll -->
2498 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2499 @end example
2500
2501 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2502 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2503 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2504 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2505 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2506 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2507 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2508 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2509
2510 Original:
2511 @example
2512 --foo.h
2513 extern int arr[];
2514 --foo.c
2515 #include "foo.h"
2516 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2517 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2518 @}
2519 @end example
2520
2521 Solution 1:
2522 @example
2523 --foo.h
2524 extern int arr[];
2525 --foo.c
2526 #include "foo.h"
2527 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2528 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2529 volatile int *parr = arr;
2530 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2531 @}
2532 @end example
2533
2534 Solution 2:
2535 @example
2536 --foo.h
2537 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2538 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2539 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2540 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2541 #else
2542 #define FOO_IMPORT
2543 #endif
2544 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2545 --foo.c
2546 #include "foo.h"
2547 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2548 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2549 @}
2550 @end example
2551
2552 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2553 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2554 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2555 functions).
2556 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2557
2558 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2559 @item --disable-auto-import
2560 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2561 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2562 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2565 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2566 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2567 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2568 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2569 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2570 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2571
2572 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2573 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2574 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2575 DLLs. This is the default.
2576 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2577
2578 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2579 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2580 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2581 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2582
2583 @kindex --section-alignment
2584 @item --section-alignment
2585 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2586 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2587 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2588
2589 @cindex stack size
2590 @kindex --stack
2591 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2592 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2593 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2594 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2595 committed.
2596 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2597
2598 @kindex --subsystem
2599 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2600 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2601 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2602 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2603 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2604 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2605 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2606 @var{which}.
2607 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2608
2609 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2610 of the PE file header:
2611 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2612
2613 @kindex --dynamicbase
2614 @item --dynamicbase
2615 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2616 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2617 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2618
2619 @kindex --forceinteg
2620 @item --forceinteg
2621 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2622
2623 @kindex --nxcompat
2624 @item --nxcompat
2625 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2626 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2627
2628 @kindex --no-isolation
2629 @item --no-isolation
2630 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2631
2632 @kindex --no-seh
2633 @item --no-seh
2634 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2635 this image.
2636
2637 @kindex --no-bind
2638 @item --no-bind
2639 Do not bind this image.
2640
2641 @kindex --wdmdriver
2642 @item --wdmdriver
2643 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2644
2645 @kindex --tsaware
2646 @item --tsaware
2647 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2648
2649 @end table
2650
2651 @c man end
2652
2653 @ifset C6X
2654 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2655
2656 @c man begin OPTIONS
2657
2658 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2659 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2660 all executables use an index of 0.
2661
2662 @table @gcctabopt
2663
2664 @kindex --dsbt-size
2665 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2666 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2667 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2668 entries.
2669
2670 @kindex --dsbt-index
2671 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2672 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2673 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2674 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2675 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2676
2677 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2678 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2679 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2680
2681 @end table
2682
2683 @c man end
2684 @end ifset
2685
2686 @ifset M68HC11
2687 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2688
2689 @c man begin OPTIONS
2690
2691 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2692 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2693
2694 @table @gcctabopt
2695
2696 @kindex --no-trampoline
2697 @item --no-trampoline
2698 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2699 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2700 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2701
2702 @kindex --bank-window
2703 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2704 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2705 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2706 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2707 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2708
2709 @end table
2710
2711 @c man end
2712 @end ifset
2713
2714 @ifset M68K
2715 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2716
2717 @c man begin OPTIONS
2718
2719 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2720 when linking for 68K targets.
2721
2722 @table @gcctabopt
2723
2724 @kindex --got
2725 @item --got=@var{type}
2726 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2727 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2728 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2729 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2730
2731 @end table
2732
2733 @c man end
2734 @end ifset
2735
2736 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2737 @node Environment
2738 @section Environment Variables
2739
2740 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2741
2742 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2743 @ifclear SingleFormat
2744 @code{GNUTARGET},
2745 @end ifclear
2746 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2747
2748 @ifclear SingleFormat
2749 @kindex GNUTARGET
2750 @cindex default input format
2751 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2752 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2753 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2754 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2755 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2756 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2757 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2758 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2759 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2760 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2761 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2762 @end ifclear
2763
2764 @kindex LDEMULATION
2765 @cindex default emulation
2766 @cindex emulation, default
2767 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2768 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2769 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2770 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2771 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2772 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2773 linker was configured.
2774
2775 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2776 @cindex demangling, default
2777 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2778 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2779 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2780 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2781 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2782 options.
2783
2784 @c man end
2785 @end ifset
2786
2787 @node Scripts
2788 @chapter Linker Scripts
2789
2790 @cindex scripts
2791 @cindex linker scripts
2792 @cindex command files
2793 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2794 written in the linker command language.
2795
2796 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2797 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2798 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2799 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2800 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2801 described below.
2802
2803 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2804 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2805 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2806 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2807 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2808
2809 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2810 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2811 default linker script.
2812
2813 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2814 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2815 Linker Scripts}.
2816
2817 @menu
2818 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2819 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2820 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2821 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2822 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2823 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2824 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2825 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2826 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2827 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2828 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2829 @end menu
2830
2831 @node Basic Script Concepts
2832 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2833 @cindex linker script concepts
2834 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2835 describe the linker script language.
2836
2837 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2838 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2839 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2840 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2841 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2842 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2843 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2844 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2845
2846 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2847 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2848 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2849 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2850 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2851 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2852 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2853 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2854 of debugging information.
2855
2856 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2857 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2858 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2859 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2860 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2861 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2862 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2863 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2864 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2865 RAM address would be the VMA.
2866
2867 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2868 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2869
2870 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2871 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2872 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2873 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2874 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2875 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2876 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2877
2878 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2879 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2880 option.
2881
2882 @node Script Format
2883 @section Linker Script Format
2884 @cindex linker script format
2885 Linker scripts are text files.
2886
2887 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2888 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2889 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2890 generally ignored.
2891
2892 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2893 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2894 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2895 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2896 file name.
2897
2898 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2899 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2900 to whitespace.
2901
2902 @node Simple Example
2903 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2904 @cindex linker script example
2905 @cindex example of linker script
2906 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2907
2908 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2909 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2910 memory layout of the output file.
2911
2912 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2913 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2914 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2915 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2916 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2917 your input files.
2918
2919 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2920 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2921 linker script which will do that:
2922 @smallexample
2923 SECTIONS
2924 @{
2925 . = 0x10000;
2926 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2927 . = 0x8000000;
2928 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2929 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2930 @}
2931 @end smallexample
2932
2933 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2934 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2935 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2936
2937 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2938 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2939 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2940 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2941 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2942 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2943 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2944
2945 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2946 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2947 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2948 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2949 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2950 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2951
2952 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2953 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2954 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2955
2956 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2957 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2958 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2959 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2960 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2961 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2962 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2963
2964 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2965 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2966 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2967 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2968 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2969 sections.
2970
2971 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2972
2973 @node Simple Commands
2974 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2975 @cindex linker script simple commands
2976 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2977
2978 @menu
2979 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2980 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2981 @ifclear SingleFormat
2982 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2983 @end ifclear
2984
2985 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2986 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2987 @end menu
2988
2989 @node Entry Point
2990 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2991 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2992 @cindex start of execution
2993 @cindex first instruction
2994 @cindex entry point
2995 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2996 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2997 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2998 @smallexample
2999 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3000 @end smallexample
3001
3002 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3003 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3004 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3005 @itemize @bullet
3006 @item
3007 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3008 @item
3009 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3010 @item
3011 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3012 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3013 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3014 @item
3015 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3016 @item
3017 The address @code{0}.
3018 @end itemize
3019
3020 @node File Commands
3021 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3022 @cindex linker script file commands
3023 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3024
3025 @table @code
3026 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3027 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3028 @cindex including a linker script
3029 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3030 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3031 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3032 10 levels deep.
3033
3034 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3035 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3036
3037 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3038 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3039 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3040 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3041 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3042 @cindex linker script input object files
3043 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3044 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3045
3046 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3047 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3048 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3049
3050 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3051 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3052
3053 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3054 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3055 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3056 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3057 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3058 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3059 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3060
3061 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3062 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3063 @samp{-l}.
3064
3065 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3066 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3067 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3068
3069 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3070 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3071 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3072 @cindex grouping input files
3073 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3074 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3075 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3076 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3077
3078 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3079 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3080 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3081 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3082 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3083 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3084 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3085 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3086 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3087 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3088 setting afterwards.
3089
3090 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3091 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3092 @cindex output file name in linker script
3093 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3094 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3095 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3096 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3097 precedence.
3098
3099 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3100 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3101
3102 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3103 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3104 @cindex library search path in linker script
3105 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3106 @cindex search path in linker script
3107 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3108 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3109 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3110 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3111 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3112 the command line option are searched first.
3113
3114 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3115 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3116 @cindex first input file
3117 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3118 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3119 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3120 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3121 first file.
3122 @end table
3123
3124 @ifclear SingleFormat
3125 @node Format Commands
3126 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3127 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3128
3129 @table @code
3130 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3131 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3132 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3133 @cindex output file format in linker script
3134 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3135 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3136 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3137 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3138 line option takes precedence.
3139
3140 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3141 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3142 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3143 desired endianness.
3144
3145 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3146 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3147 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3148 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3149
3150 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3151 command:
3152 @smallexample
3153 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3154 @end smallexample
3155 This says that the default format for the output file is
3156 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3157 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3158 format.
3159
3160 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3161 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3162 @cindex input file format in linker script
3163 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3164 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3165 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3166 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3167 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3168 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3169 @end table
3170 @end ifclear
3171
3172 @node REGION_ALIAS
3173 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3174 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3175 @cindex region alias
3176 @cindex region names
3177
3178 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3179 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3180
3181 @smallexample
3182 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3183 @end smallexample
3184
3185 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3186 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3187 to memory regions. An example follows.
3188
3189 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3190 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3191 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3192 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3193 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3194 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3195 sections:
3196
3197 @itemize @bullet
3198 @item
3199 @code{.text} program code;
3200 @item
3201 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3202 @item
3203 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3204 @item
3205 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3206 @end itemize
3207
3208 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3209 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3210 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3211 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3212 @code{C}:
3213 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3214 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3215 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3216 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3217 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3218 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3219 @end multitable
3220 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3221 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3222 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3223 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3224
3225 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3226 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3227 memory layout:
3228 @smallexample
3229 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3230
3231 SECTIONS
3232 @{
3233 .text :
3234 @{
3235 *(.text)
3236 @} > REGION_TEXT
3237 .rodata :
3238 @{
3239 *(.rodata)
3240 rodata_end = .;
3241 @} > REGION_RODATA
3242 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3243 @{
3244 data_start = .;
3245 *(.data)
3246 @} > REGION_DATA
3247 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3248 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3249 .bss :
3250 @{
3251 *(.bss)
3252 @} > REGION_BSS
3253 @}
3254 @end smallexample
3255
3256 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3257 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3258 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3259 @table @code
3260 @item A
3261 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3262 @smallexample
3263 MEMORY
3264 @{
3265 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3266 @}
3267
3268 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3269 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3270 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3271 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3272 @end smallexample
3273 @item B
3274 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3275 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3276 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3277 @smallexample
3278 MEMORY
3279 @{
3280 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3281 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3282 @}
3283
3284 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3285 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3286 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3287 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3288 @end smallexample
3289 @item C
3290 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3291 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3292 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3293 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3294 @smallexample
3295 MEMORY
3296 @{
3297 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3298 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3299 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3300 @}
3301
3302 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3303 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3304 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3305 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3306 @end smallexample
3307 @end table
3308
3309 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3310 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3311 necessary:
3312 @smallexample
3313 #include <string.h>
3314
3315 extern char data_start [];
3316 extern char data_size [];
3317 extern char data_load_start [];
3318
3319 void copy_data(void)
3320 @{
3321 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3322 @{
3323 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3324 @}
3325 @}
3326 @end smallexample
3327
3328 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3329 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3330 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3331
3332 @table @code
3333 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3334 @kindex ASSERT
3335 @cindex assertion in linker script
3336 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3337 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3338
3339 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3340 @kindex EXTERN
3341 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3342 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3343 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3344 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3345 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3346 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3347
3348 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3349 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3350 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3351 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3352 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3353 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3354
3355 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3356 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3357 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3358 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3359 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3360 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3361
3362 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3363 @kindex INSERT
3364 @cindex insert user script into default script
3365 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3366 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3367 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3368 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3369 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3370 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3371 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3372 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3373 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3374 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3375 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3376 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3377 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3378
3379 @smallexample
3380 SECTIONS
3381 @{
3382 OVERLAY :
3383 @{
3384 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3385 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3386 @}
3387 @}
3388 INSERT AFTER .text;
3389 @end smallexample
3390
3391 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3392 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3393 @cindex cross references
3394 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3395 references among certain output sections.
3396
3397 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3398 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3399 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3400 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3401 a function defined in the other section.
3402
3403 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3404 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3405 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3406 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3407 names.
3408
3409 @ifclear SingleFormat
3410 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3411 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3412 @cindex machine architecture
3413 @cindex architecture
3414 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3415 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3416 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3417 the @samp{-f} option.
3418 @end ifclear
3419
3420 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3421 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3422 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3423 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3424 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3425 @xref{Expression Section}.
3426 @end table
3427
3428 @node Assignments
3429 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3430 @cindex assignment in scripts
3431 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3432 @cindex variables, defining
3433 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3434 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3435
3436 @menu
3437 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3438 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3439 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3440 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3441 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3442 @end menu
3443
3444 @node Simple Assignments
3445 @subsection Simple Assignments
3446
3447 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3448
3449 @table @code
3450 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3451 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3452 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3453 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3454 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3455 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3456 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3457 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3458 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3459 @end table
3460
3461 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3462 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3463 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3464
3465 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3466 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3467
3468 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3469
3470 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3471
3472 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3473 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3474 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3475
3476 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3477 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3478
3479 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3480 assignments may be used:
3481
3482 @smallexample
3483 floating_point = 0;
3484 SECTIONS
3485 @{
3486 .text :
3487 @{
3488 *(.text)
3489 _etext = .;
3490 @}
3491 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3492 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3493 @}
3494 @end smallexample
3495 @noindent
3496 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3497 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3498 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3499 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3500 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3501
3502 @node HIDDEN
3503 @subsection HIDDEN
3504 @cindex HIDDEN
3505 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3506 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3507
3508 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3509 @code{HIDDEN}:
3510
3511 @smallexample
3512 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3513 SECTIONS
3514 @{
3515 .text :
3516 @{
3517 *(.text)
3518 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3519 @}
3520 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3521 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3522 @}
3523 @end smallexample
3524 @noindent
3525 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3526
3527 @node PROVIDE
3528 @subsection PROVIDE
3529 @cindex PROVIDE
3530 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3531 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3532 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3533 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3534 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3535 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3536 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3537 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3538
3539 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3540 @smallexample
3541 SECTIONS
3542 @{
3543 .text :
3544 @{
3545 *(.text)
3546 _etext = .;
3547 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3548 @}
3549 @}
3550 @end smallexample
3551
3552 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3553 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3554 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3555 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3556 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3557 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3558
3559 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3560 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3561 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3562 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3563 hidden and won't be exported.
3564
3565 @node Source Code Reference
3566 @subsection Source Code Reference
3567
3568 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3569 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3570 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3571 symbol that does not have a value.
3572
3573 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3574 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3575 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3576 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3577 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3578 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3579 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3580 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3581
3582 @smallexample
3583 extern int foo;
3584 @end smallexample
3585
3586 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3587
3588 @smallexample
3589 _foo = 1000;
3590 @end smallexample
3591
3592 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3593 transformation has taken place.
3594
3595 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3596 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3597 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3598 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3599 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3600 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3601 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3602
3603 @smallexample
3604 int foo = 1000;
3605 @end smallexample
3606
3607 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3608 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3609 number 1000 is initially stored.
3610
3611 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3612 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3613 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3614 So:
3615
3616 @smallexample
3617 foo = 1;
3618 @end smallexample
3619
3620 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3621 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3622 address. Whereas:
3623
3624 @smallexample
3625 int * a = & foo;
3626 @end smallexample
3627
3628 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3629 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3630 the variable @samp{a}.
3631
3632 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3633 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3634 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3635
3636 @smallexample
3637 foo = 1000;
3638 @end smallexample
3639
3640 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3641 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3642 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3643 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3644 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3645
3646 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3647 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3648 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3649 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3650 linker script contains these declarations:
3651
3652 @smallexample
3653 @group
3654 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3655 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3656 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3657 @end group
3658 @end smallexample
3659
3660 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3661
3662 @smallexample
3663 @group
3664 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3665
3666 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3667 @end group
3668 @end smallexample
3669
3670 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3671
3672 @node SECTIONS
3673 @section SECTIONS Command
3674 @kindex SECTIONS
3675 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3676 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3677
3678 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3679 @smallexample
3680 SECTIONS
3681 @{
3682 @var{sections-command}
3683 @var{sections-command}
3684 @dots{}
3685 @}
3686 @end smallexample
3687
3688 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3689
3690 @itemize @bullet
3691 @item
3692 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3693 @item
3694 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3695 @item
3696 an output section description
3697 @item
3698 an overlay description
3699 @end itemize
3700
3701 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3702 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3703 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3704 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3705 the layout of the output file.
3706
3707 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3708 below.
3709
3710 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3711 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3712 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3713 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3714 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3715 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3716
3717 @menu
3718 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3719 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3720 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3721 * Input Section:: Input section description
3722 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3723 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3724 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3725 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3726 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3727 @end menu
3728
3729 @node Output Section Description
3730 @subsection Output Section Description
3731 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3732 @smallexample
3733 @group
3734 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3735 [AT(@var{lma})]
3736 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3737 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3738 [@var{constraint}]
3739 @{
3740 @var{output-section-command}
3741 @var{output-section-command}
3742 @dots{}
3743 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3744 @end group
3745 @end smallexample
3746
3747 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3748
3749 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3750 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3751 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3752
3753 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3754
3755 @itemize @bullet
3756 @item
3757 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3758 @item
3759 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3760 @item
3761 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3762 @item
3763 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3764 @end itemize
3765
3766 @node Output Section Name
3767 @subsection Output Section Name
3768 @cindex name, section
3769 @cindex section name
3770 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3771 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3772 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3773 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3774 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3775 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3776 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3777 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3778 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3779 commas must be quoted.
3780
3781 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3782 Discarding}.
3783
3784 @node Output Section Address
3785 @subsection Output Section Address
3786 @cindex address, section
3787 @cindex section address
3788 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3789 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3790 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3791
3792 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3793 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3794 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3795 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3796 contained within the output section.
3797
3798 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3799
3800 @itemize @bullet
3801 @item
3802 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3803 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3804 in that region.
3805
3806 @item
3807 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3808 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3809 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3810 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3811
3812 @item
3813 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3814 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3815 counter.
3816 @end itemize
3817
3818 @noindent
3819 For example:
3820
3821 @smallexample
3822 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3823 @end smallexample
3824
3825 @noindent
3826 and
3827
3828 @smallexample
3829 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3830 @end smallexample
3831
3832 @noindent
3833 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3834 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3835 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3836 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3837 input sections.
3838
3839 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3840 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3841 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3842 do something like this:
3843 @smallexample
3844 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3845 @end smallexample
3846 @noindent
3847 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3848 aligned upward to the specified value.
3849
3850 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3851 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3852 sections are ignored).
3853
3854 @node Input Section
3855 @subsection Input Section Description
3856 @cindex input sections
3857 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3858 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3859
3860 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3861 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3862 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3863 map the input files into your memory layout.
3864
3865 @menu
3866 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3867 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3868 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3869 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3870 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3871 @end menu
3872
3873 @node Input Section Basics
3874 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3875 @cindex input section basics
3876 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3877 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3878
3879 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3880 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3881
3882 The most common input section description is to include all input
3883 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3884 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3885 @smallexample
3886 *(.text)
3887 @end smallexample
3888 @noindent
3889 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3890 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3891 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3892 example:
3893 @smallexample
3894 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3895 @end smallexample
3896 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3897 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3898
3899 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3900 @smallexample
3901 *(.text .rdata)
3902 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3903 @end smallexample
3904 @noindent
3905 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3906 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3907 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3908 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3909 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3910 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3911
3912 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3913 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3914 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3915 @smallexample
3916 data.o(.data)
3917 @end smallexample
3918
3919 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3920 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3921
3922 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3923
3924 @smallexample
3925 @group
3926 SECTIONS @{
3927 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3928 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3929 @}
3930 @end group
3931 @end smallexample
3932
3933 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3934 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3935 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3936 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3937 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3938
3939 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3940 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3941 with no whitespace around the colon.
3942
3943 @table @samp
3944 @item archive:file
3945 matches file within archive
3946 @item archive:
3947 matches the whole archive
3948 @item :file
3949 matches file but not one in an archive
3950 @end table
3951
3952 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3953 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3954 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3955 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3956 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3957 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3958 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3959 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3960 command.
3961
3962 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3963 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3964 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3965 @smallexample
3966 data.o
3967 @end smallexample
3968
3969 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3970 and does not contain any wild card
3971 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3972 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3973 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3974 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3975 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3976 the archive search path.
3977
3978 @node Input Section Wildcards
3979 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3980 @cindex input section wildcards
3981 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3982 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3983 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3984 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3985 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3986
3987 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3988 pattern for the file name.
3989
3990 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3991
3992 @table @samp
3993 @item *
3994 matches any number of characters
3995 @item ?
3996 matches any single character
3997 @item [@var{chars}]
3998 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3999 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4000 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4001 @item \
4002 quotes the following character
4003 @end table
4004
4005 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4006 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4007 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4008 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4009 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4010 a @samp{/} character.
4011
4012 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4013 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4014 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4015
4016 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4017 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4018 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4019 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4020 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4021 @smallexample
4022 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4023 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4024 @end smallexample
4025
4026 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4027 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4028 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4029 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4030 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4031 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4032 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4033
4034 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4035 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4036 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4037 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4038
4039 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4040 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4041 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4042 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4043 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4044
4045 @cindex SORT
4046 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4047
4048 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4049 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4050
4051 @enumerate
4052 @item
4053 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4054 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4055 sections have the same name.
4056 @item
4057 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4058 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4059 sections have the same alignment.
4060 @item
4061 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4062 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4063 @item
4064 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4065 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4066 @item
4067 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4068 @end enumerate
4069
4070 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4071 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4072 takes precedence over the command line option.
4073
4074 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4075 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4076 treated as nested sorting command.
4077
4078 @enumerate
4079 @item
4080 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4081 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4082 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4083 @item
4084 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4085 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4086 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4087 @end enumerate
4088
4089 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4090 command line option will be ignored.
4091
4092 @cindex SORT_NONE
4093 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4094 section sorting option.
4095
4096 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4097 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4098 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4099
4100 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4101 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4102 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4103 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4104 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4105 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4106 @smallexample
4107 @group
4108 SECTIONS @{
4109 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4110 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4111 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4112 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4113 @}
4114 @end group
4115 @end smallexample
4116
4117 @node Input Section Common
4118 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4119 @cindex common symbol placement
4120 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4121 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4122 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4123 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4124 named @samp{COMMON}.
4125
4126 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4127 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4128 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4129 input files are placed in another section.
4130
4131 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4132 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4133 @smallexample
4134 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4135 @end smallexample
4136
4137 @cindex scommon section
4138 @cindex small common symbols
4139 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4140 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4141 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4142 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4143 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4144 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4145 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4146 locations.
4147
4148 @cindex [COMMON]
4149 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4150 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4151 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4152
4153 @node Input Section Keep
4154 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4155 @cindex KEEP
4156 @cindex garbage collection
4157 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4158 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4159 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4160 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4161 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4162
4163 @node Input Section Example
4164 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4165 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4166 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4167 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4168 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4169 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4170 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4171 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4172 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4173 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4174
4175 @smallexample
4176 @group
4177 SECTIONS @{
4178 outputa 0x10000 :
4179 @{
4180 all.o
4181 foo.o (.input1)
4182 @}
4183 @end group
4184 @group
4185 outputb :
4186 @{
4187 foo.o (.input2)
4188 foo1.o (.input1)
4189 @}
4190 @end group
4191 @group
4192 outputc :
4193 @{
4194 *(.input1)
4195 *(.input2)
4196 @}
4197 @}
4198 @end group
4199 @end smallexample
4200
4201 @node Output Section Data
4202 @subsection Output Section Data
4203 @cindex data
4204 @cindex section data
4205 @cindex output section data
4206 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4207 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4208 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4209 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4210 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4211 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4212 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4213 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4214 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4215 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4216 counter.
4217
4218 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4219 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4220 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4221 stored.
4222
4223 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4224 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4225 @smallexample
4226 BYTE(1)
4227 LONG(addr)
4228 @end smallexample
4229
4230 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4231 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4232 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4233 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4234 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4235
4236 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4237 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4238 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4239 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4240 endianness of the first input object file.
4241
4242 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4243 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4244 @smallexample
4245 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4246 @end smallexample
4247 whereas this will work:
4248 @smallexample
4249 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4250 @end smallexample
4251
4252 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4253 @cindex holes, filling
4254 @cindex unspecified memory
4255 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4256 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4257 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4258 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4259 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4260 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4261 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4262 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4263 different parts of an output section.
4264
4265 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4266 value @samp{0x90}:
4267 @smallexample
4268 FILL(0x90909090)
4269 @end smallexample
4270
4271 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4272 section attribute, but it only affects the
4273 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4274 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4275 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4276 expression.
4277
4278 @node Output Section Keywords
4279 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4280 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4281 commands.
4282
4283 @table @code
4284 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4285 @cindex input filename symbols
4286 @cindex filename symbols
4287 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4288 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4289 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4290 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4291 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4292
4293 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4294 normally used for any other object file format.
4295
4296 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4297 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4298 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4299 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4300 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4301 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4302 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4303 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4304 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4305 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4306 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4307 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4308 ignored for other object file formats.
4309
4310 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4311 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4312 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4313 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4314 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4315 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4316 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4317 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4318 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4319 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4320 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4321 @code{exit}.
4322
4323 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4324 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4325 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4326 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4327 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4328 runtime code expects to see.
4329
4330 @smallexample
4331 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4332 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4333 *(.ctors)
4334 LONG(0)
4335 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4336 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4337 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4338 *(.dtors)
4339 LONG(0)
4340 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4341 @end smallexample
4342
4343 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4344 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4345 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4346 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4347 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4348 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4349 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4350 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4351
4352 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4353 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4354 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4355 scripts.
4356
4357 @end table
4358
4359 @node Output Section Discarding
4360 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4361 @cindex discarding sections
4362 @cindex sections, discarding
4363 @cindex removing sections
4364 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4365 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4366 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4367 @smallexample
4368 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4369 @end smallexample
4370 @noindent
4371 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4372 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4373 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4374 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4375
4376 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4377 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4378 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4379 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4380 section is discarded.
4381
4382 @cindex /DISCARD/
4383 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4384 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4385 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4386
4387 @node Output Section Attributes
4388 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4389 @cindex output section attributes
4390 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4391 like this:
4392
4393 @smallexample
4394 @group
4395 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4396 [AT(@var{lma})]
4397 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4398 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4399 [@var{constraint}]
4400 @{
4401 @var{output-section-command}
4402 @var{output-section-command}
4403 @dots{}
4404 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4405 @end group
4406 @end smallexample
4407
4408 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4409 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4410 remaining section attributes.
4411
4412 @menu
4413 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4414 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4415 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4416 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4417 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4418 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4419 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4420 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4421 @end menu
4422
4423 @node Output Section Type
4424 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4425 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4426 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4427
4428 @table @code
4429 @item NOLOAD
4430 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4431 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4432 @item DSECT
4433 @itemx COPY
4434 @itemx INFO
4435 @itemx OVERLAY
4436 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4437 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4438 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4439 section when the program is run.
4440 @end table
4441
4442 @kindex NOLOAD
4443 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4444 @cindex loading, preventing
4445 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4446 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4447 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4448 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4449 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4450 @smallexample
4451 @group
4452 SECTIONS @{
4453 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4454 @dots{}
4455 @}
4456 @end group
4457 @end smallexample
4458
4459 @node Output Section LMA
4460 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4461 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4462 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4463 @cindex load address
4464 @cindex section load address
4465 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4466 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4467 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4468 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4469 address is optional.
4470
4471 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4472 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4473 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4474 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4475 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4476
4477 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4478 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4479 load address:
4480
4481 @itemize @bullet
4482 @item
4483 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4484 the LMA address as well.
4485
4486 @item
4487 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4488
4489 @item
4490 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4491 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4492 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4493 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4494 the last section in the located region.
4495
4496 @item
4497 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4498 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4499
4500 @item
4501 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4502 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4503 @end itemize
4504
4505 @cindex ROM initialized data
4506 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4507 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4508 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4509 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4510 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4511 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4512 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4513 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4514 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4515
4516 @smallexample
4517 @group
4518 SECTIONS
4519 @{
4520 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4521 .mdata 0x2000 :
4522 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4523 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4524 .bss 0x3000 :
4525 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4526 @}
4527 @end group
4528 @end smallexample
4529
4530 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4531 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4532 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4533 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4534 script.
4535
4536 @smallexample
4537 @group
4538 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4539 char *src = &_etext;
4540 char *dst = &_data;
4541
4542 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4543 while (dst < &_edata)
4544 *dst++ = *src++;
4545
4546 /* Zero bss. */
4547 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4548 *dst = 0;
4549 @end group
4550 @end smallexample
4551
4552 @node Forced Output Alignment
4553 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4554 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4555 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4556 @cindex output section alignment
4557 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4558
4559 @node Forced Input Alignment
4560 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4561 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4562 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4563 @cindex input section alignment
4564 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4565 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4566 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4567
4568 @node Output Section Constraint
4569 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4570 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4571 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4572 @cindex constraints on output sections
4573 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4574 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4575 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4576 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4577
4578 @node Output Section Region
4579 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4580 @kindex >@var{region}
4581 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4582 @cindex memory regions and sections
4583 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4584 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4585
4586 Here is a simple example:
4587 @smallexample
4588 @group
4589 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4590 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4591 @end group
4592 @end smallexample
4593
4594 @node Output Section Phdr
4595 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4596 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4597 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4598 @cindex program headers and sections
4599 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4600 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4601 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4602 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4603 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4604 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4605
4606 Here is a simple example:
4607 @smallexample
4608 @group
4609 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4610 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4611 @end group
4612 @end smallexample
4613
4614 @node Output Section Fill
4615 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4616 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4617 @cindex section fill pattern
4618 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4619 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4620 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4621 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4622 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4623 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4624 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4625 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4626 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4627 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4628 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4629 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4630 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4631
4632 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4633 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4634
4635 Here is a simple example:
4636 @smallexample
4637 @group
4638 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4639 @end group
4640 @end smallexample
4641
4642 @node Overlay Description
4643 @subsection Overlay Description
4644 @kindex OVERLAY
4645 @cindex overlays
4646 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4647 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4648 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4649 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4650 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4651 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4652 than another.
4653
4654 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4655 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4656 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4657 command is as follows:
4658 @smallexample
4659 @group
4660 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4661 @{
4662 @var{secname1}
4663 @{
4664 @var{output-section-command}
4665 @var{output-section-command}
4666 @dots{}
4667 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4668 @var{secname2}
4669 @{
4670 @var{output-section-command}
4671 @var{output-section-command}
4672 @dots{}
4673 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4674 @dots{}
4675 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4676 @end group
4677 @end smallexample
4678
4679 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4680 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4681 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4682 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4683 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4684 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4685
4686 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4687 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4688 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4689 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4690 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4691 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4692
4693 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4694 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4695 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4696 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4697 NOCROSSREFS}.
4698
4699 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4700 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4701 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4702 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4703 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4704 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4705 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4706
4707 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4708 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4709
4710 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4711 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4712 @smallexample
4713 @group
4714 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4715 @{
4716 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4717 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4718 @}
4719 @end group
4720 @end smallexample
4721 @noindent
4722 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4723 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4724 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4725 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4726 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4727 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4728
4729 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4730 like the following.
4731
4732 @smallexample
4733 @group
4734 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4735 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4736 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4737 @end group
4738 @end smallexample
4739
4740 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4741 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4742 example could have been written identically as follows.
4743
4744 @smallexample
4745 @group
4746 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4747 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4748 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4749 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4750 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4751 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4752 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4753 @end group
4754 @end smallexample
4755
4756 @node MEMORY
4757 @section MEMORY Command
4758 @kindex MEMORY
4759 @cindex memory regions
4760 @cindex regions of memory
4761 @cindex allocating memory
4762 @cindex discontinuous memory
4763 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4764 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4765
4766 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4767 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4768 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4769 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4770 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4771 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4772 around to fit into the available regions.
4773
4774 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4775 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4776 you wish. The syntax is:
4777 @smallexample
4778 @group
4779 MEMORY
4780 @{
4781 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4782 @dots{}
4783 @}
4784 @end group
4785 @end smallexample
4786
4787 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4788 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4789 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4790 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4791 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4792 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4793 command.
4794
4795 @cindex memory region attributes
4796 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4797 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4798 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4799 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4800 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4801 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4802 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4803
4804 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4805 @table @samp
4806 @item R
4807 Read-only section
4808 @item W
4809 Read/write section
4810 @item X
4811 Executable section
4812 @item A
4813 Allocatable section
4814 @item I
4815 Initialized section
4816 @item L
4817 Same as @samp{I}
4818 @item !
4819 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4820 @end table
4821
4822 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4823 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4824 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4825 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4826 attributes.
4827
4828 @kindex ORIGIN =
4829 @kindex o =
4830 @kindex org =
4831 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4832 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4833 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4834 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4835 @code{ORG}).
4836
4837 @kindex LENGTH =
4838 @kindex len =
4839 @kindex l =
4840 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4841 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4842 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4843 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4844
4845 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4846 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4847 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4848 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4849 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4850 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4851 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4852 region.
4853
4854 @smallexample
4855 @group
4856 MEMORY
4857 @{
4858 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4859 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4860 @}
4861 @end group
4862 @end smallexample
4863
4864 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4865 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4866 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4867 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4868 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4869 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4870 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4871 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4872 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4873
4874 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4875 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4876 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4877
4878 @smallexample
4879 @group
4880 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4881 @end group
4882 @end smallexample
4883
4884 @node PHDRS
4885 @section PHDRS Command
4886 @kindex PHDRS
4887 @cindex program headers
4888 @cindex ELF program headers
4889 @cindex program segments
4890 @cindex segments, ELF
4891 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4892 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4893 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4894 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4895
4896 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4897 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4898 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4899 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4900 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4901
4902 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4903 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4904 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4905 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4906 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4907
4908 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4909 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4910 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4911
4912 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4913 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4914
4915 @smallexample
4916 @group
4917 PHDRS
4918 @{
4919 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4920 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4921 @}
4922 @end group
4923 @end smallexample
4924
4925 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4926 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4927 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4928 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4929 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4930 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4931
4932 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4933 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4934 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4935 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4936 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4937 Section Phdr}.
4938
4939 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4940 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4941 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4942 contain the section.
4943
4944 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4945 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4946 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4947 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4948 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4949 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4950 segment at all.
4951
4952 @kindex FILEHDR
4953 @kindex PHDRS
4954 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4955 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4956 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4957 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4958 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4959 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4960 these keywords.
4961
4962 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4963 value of the keyword.
4964
4965 @table @asis
4966 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4967 Indicates an unused program header.
4968
4969 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4970 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4971 the file.
4972
4973 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4974 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4975
4976 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4977 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4978 found.
4979
4980 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4981 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4982
4983 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4984 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4985 ABI.
4986
4987 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4988 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4989
4990 @item @var{expression}
4991 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4992 be used for types not defined above.
4993 @end table
4994
4995 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4996 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4997 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4998 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4999 output section attribute.
5000
5001 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5002 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5003 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5004 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5005 header.
5006
5007 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5008 headers used on a native ELF system.
5009
5010 @example
5011 @group
5012 PHDRS
5013 @{
5014 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5015 interp PT_INTERP ;
5016 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5017 data PT_LOAD ;
5018 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5019 @}
5020
5021 SECTIONS
5022 @{
5023 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5024 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5025 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5026 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5027 @dots{}
5028 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5029 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5030 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5031 @dots{}
5032 @}
5033 @end group
5034 @end example
5035
5036 @node VERSION
5037 @section VERSION Command
5038 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5039 @cindex symbol versions
5040 @cindex version script
5041 @cindex versions of symbols
5042 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5043 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5044 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5045 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5046 shared library.
5047
5048 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5049 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5050 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5051
5052 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5053 @smallexample
5054 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5055 @end smallexample
5056
5057 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5058 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5059 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5060 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5061 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5062 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5063 library.
5064
5065 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5066 examples.
5067
5068 @smallexample
5069 VERS_1.1 @{
5070 global:
5071 foo1;
5072 local:
5073 old*;
5074 original*;
5075 new*;
5076 @};
5077
5078 VERS_1.2 @{
5079 foo2;
5080 @} VERS_1.1;
5081
5082 VERS_2.0 @{
5083 bar1; bar2;
5084 extern "C++" @{
5085 ns::*;
5086 "f(int, double)";
5087 @};
5088 @} VERS_1.2;
5089 @end smallexample
5090
5091 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5092 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5093 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5094 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5095 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5096 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5097 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5098 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5099 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5100 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5101
5102 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5103 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5104 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5105
5106 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5107 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5108 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5109
5110 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5111 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5112 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5113 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5114 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5115 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5116 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5117 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5118 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5119
5120 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5121 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5122 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5123 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5124
5125 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5126 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5127 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5128 won't.
5129
5130 @smallexample
5131 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5132 @end smallexample
5133
5134 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5135 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5136 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5137 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5138 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5139 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5140 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5141 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5142 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5143 search for each symbol reference.
5144
5145 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5146 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5147 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5148 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5149 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5150 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5151 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5152 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5153 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5154
5155 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5156 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5157 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5158 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5159 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5160 @smallexample
5161 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5162 @end smallexample
5163 @noindent
5164 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5165 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5166 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5167 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5168 takes precedence over a version script.
5169
5170 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5171 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5172 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5173 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5174 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5175
5176 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5177 source file. Here is an example:
5178
5179 @smallexample
5180 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5181 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5182 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5183 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5184 @end smallexample
5185
5186 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5187 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5188 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5189 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5190
5191 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5192 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5193 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5194 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5195 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5196 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5197
5198 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5199 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5200 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5201 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5202
5203 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5204
5205 @smallexample
5206 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5207 @end smallexample
5208
5209 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5210 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5211 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5212 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5213 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5214
5215 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5216 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5217 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5218 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5219 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5220 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5221 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5222 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5223 expect when you upgrade.
5224
5225 @node Expressions
5226 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5227 @cindex expressions
5228 @cindex arithmetic
5229 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5230 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5231 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5232 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5233
5234 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5235
5236 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5237 expressions.
5238
5239 @menu
5240 * Constants:: Constants
5241 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5242 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5243 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5244 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5245 * Operators:: Operators
5246 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5247 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5248 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5249 @end menu
5250
5251 @node Constants
5252 @subsection Constants
5253 @cindex integer notation
5254 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5255 All constants are integers.
5256
5257 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5258 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5259 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5260 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5261 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5262 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5263
5264 @cindex scaled integers
5265 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5266 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5267 @cindex suffixes for integers
5268 @cindex integer suffixes
5269 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5270 constant by
5271 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5272 @ifnottex
5273 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5274 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5275 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5276 @end ifnottex
5277 @tex
5278 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5279 @end tex
5280 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5281 respectively. For example, the following
5282 all refer to the same quantity:
5283
5284 @smallexample
5285 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5286 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5287 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5288 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5289 @end smallexample
5290
5291 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5292 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5293
5294 @node Symbolic Constants
5295 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5296 @cindex symbolic constants
5297 @kindex CONSTANT
5298 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5299 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5300
5301 @table @code
5302 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5303 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5304 The target's maximum page size.
5305
5306 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5307 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5308 The target's default page size.
5309 @end table
5310
5311 So for example:
5312
5313 @smallexample
5314 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5315 @end smallexample
5316
5317 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5318 supported by the target.
5319
5320 @node Symbols
5321 @subsection Symbol Names
5322 @cindex symbol names
5323 @cindex names
5324 @cindex quoted symbol names
5325 @kindex "
5326 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5327 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5328 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5329 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5330 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5331 @smallexample
5332 "SECTION" = 9;
5333 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5334 @end smallexample
5335
5336 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5337 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5338 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5339
5340 @node Orphan Sections
5341 @subsection Orphan Sections
5342 @cindex orphan
5343 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5344 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5345 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5346 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5347 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5348 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5349 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5350 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5351 at the end of the file.
5352
5353 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5354 well as section flag.
5355
5356 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5357 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5358 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5359 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5360 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5361 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5362 character.
5363
5364 @node Location Counter
5365 @subsection The Location Counter
5366 @kindex .
5367 @cindex dot
5368 @cindex location counter
5369 @cindex current output location
5370 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5371 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5372 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5373 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5374 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5375
5376 @cindex holes
5377 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5378 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5379 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5380 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5381 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5382
5383 @smallexample
5384 SECTIONS
5385 @{
5386 output :
5387 @{
5388 file1(.text)
5389 . = . + 1000;
5390 file2(.text)
5391 . += 1000;
5392 file3(.text)
5393 @} = 0x12345678;
5394 @}
5395 @end smallexample
5396 @noindent
5397 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5398 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5399 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5400 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5401 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5402 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5403
5404 @cindex dot inside sections
5405 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5406 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5407 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5408 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5409 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5410 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5411
5412 @smallexample
5413 SECTIONS
5414 @{
5415 . = 0x100
5416 .text: @{
5417 *(.text)
5418 . = 0x200
5419 @}
5420 . = 0x500
5421 .data: @{
5422 *(.data)
5423 . += 0x600
5424 @}
5425 @}
5426 @end smallexample
5427
5428 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5429 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5430 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5431 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5432 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5433 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5434 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5435 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5436
5437 @cindex dot outside sections
5438 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5439 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5440 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5441
5442 @smallexample
5443 SECTIONS
5444 @{
5445 start_of_text = . ;
5446 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5447 end_of_text = . ;
5448
5449 start_of_data = . ;
5450 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5451 end_of_data = . ;
5452 @}
5453 @end smallexample
5454
5455 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5456 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5457 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5458 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5459 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5460 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5461 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5462 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5463 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5464 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5465 as follows:
5466
5467 @smallexample
5468 SECTIONS
5469 @{
5470 start_of_text = . ;
5471 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5472 end_of_text = . ;
5473
5474 start_of_data = . ;
5475 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5476 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5477 end_of_data = . ;
5478 @}
5479 @end smallexample
5480
5481 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5482 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5483 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5484 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5485 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5486 section. So you could write:
5487
5488 @smallexample
5489 SECTIONS
5490 @{
5491 start_of_text = . ;
5492 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5493 end_of_text = . ;
5494
5495 . = . ;
5496 start_of_data = . ;
5497 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5498 end_of_data = . ;
5499 @}
5500 @end smallexample
5501
5502 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5503 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5504
5505 @need 2000
5506 @node Operators
5507 @subsection Operators
5508 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5509 @cindex arithmetic operators
5510 @cindex precedence in expressions
5511 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5512 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5513 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5514 @ifnottex
5515 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5516 @smallexample
5517 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5518 (highest)
5519 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5520 2 left * / %
5521 3 left + -
5522 4 left >> <<
5523 5 left == != > < <= >=
5524 6 left &
5525 7 left |
5526 8 left &&
5527 9 left ||
5528 10 right ? :
5529 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5530 (lowest)
5531 @end smallexample
5532 Notes:
5533 (1) Prefix operators
5534 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5535 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5536 @end ifnottex
5537 @tex
5538 \vskip \baselineskip
5539 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5540 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5541 \hrule
5542 \halign
5543 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5544 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5545 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5546 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5547 \noalign{\hrule}
5548 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5549 &highest&&&&&\cr
5550 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5551 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5552 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5553 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5554 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5555 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5556 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5557 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5558 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5559 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5560 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5561 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5562 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5563 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5564 \hrule}
5565 @end tex
5566 @iftex
5567 {
5568 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5569 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5570 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5571 }
5572 @end iftex
5573 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5574
5575 @node Evaluation
5576 @subsection Evaluation
5577 @cindex lazy evaluation
5578 @cindex expression evaluation order
5579 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5580 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5581
5582 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5583 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5584 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5585 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5586
5587 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5588 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5589 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5590 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5591
5592 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5593 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5594 allocation.
5595
5596 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5597 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5598
5599 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5600 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5601 following
5602 @smallexample
5603 @group
5604 SECTIONS
5605 @{
5606 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5607 @{ *(.text) @}
5608 @}
5609 @end group
5610 @end smallexample
5611 @noindent
5612 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5613 address}.
5614
5615 @node Expression Section
5616 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5617 @cindex expression sections
5618 @cindex absolute expressions
5619 @cindex relative expressions
5620 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5621 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5622 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5623 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5624 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5625 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5626 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5627 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5628 operations.
5629
5630 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5631 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5632 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5633 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5634 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5635 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5636 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5637 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5638 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5639 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5640 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5641 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5642 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5643 everywhere.
5644
5645 In the following simple example,
5646
5647 @smallexample
5648 @group
5649 SECTIONS
5650 @{
5651 . = 0x100;
5652 __executable_start = 0x100;
5653 .data :
5654 @{
5655 . = 0x10;
5656 __data_start = 0x10;
5657 *(.data)
5658 @}
5659 @dots{}
5660 @}
5661 @end group
5662 @end smallexample
5663
5664 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5665 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5666 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5667 section in the second two assignments.
5668
5669 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5670 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5671
5672 @itemize @bullet
5673 @item
5674 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5675 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5676 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5677 @item
5678 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5679 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5680 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5681 @item
5682 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5683 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5684 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5685 before applying the operator.
5686 @end itemize
5687
5688 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5689
5690 @itemize @bullet
5691 @item
5692 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5693 @item
5694 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5695 @item
5696 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5697 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5698 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5699 @item
5700 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5701 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5702 section as the relative operand(s).
5703 @item
5704 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5705 conversions) is an absolute address.
5706 @end itemize
5707
5708 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5709 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5710 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5711 section @samp{.data}:
5712 @smallexample
5713 SECTIONS
5714 @{
5715 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5716 @}
5717 @end smallexample
5718 @noindent
5719 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5720 @samp{.data} section.
5721
5722 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5723 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5724
5725 @node Builtin Functions
5726 @subsection Builtin Functions
5727 @cindex functions in expressions
5728 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5729 use in linker script expressions.
5730
5731 @table @code
5732 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5733 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5734 @cindex expression, absolute
5735 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5736 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5737 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5738 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5739
5740 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5741 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5742 @cindex section address in expression
5743 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5744 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5745 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5746 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5747 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5748 the other two will be absolute:
5749 @smallexample
5750 @group
5751 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5752 .output1 :
5753 @{
5754 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5755 @dots{}
5756 @}
5757 .output :
5758 @{
5759 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5760 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5761 @}
5762 @dots{} @}
5763 @end group
5764 @end smallexample
5765
5766 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5767 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5768 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5769 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5770 @cindex round up location counter
5771 @cindex align location counter
5772 @cindex round up expression
5773 @cindex align expression
5774 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5775 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5776 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5777 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5778 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5779 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5780
5781 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5782 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5783 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5784 input sections:
5785 @smallexample
5786 @group
5787 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5788 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5789 *(.data)
5790 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5791 @}
5792 @dots{} @}
5793 @end group
5794 @end smallexample
5795 @noindent
5796 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5797 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5798 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5799 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5800
5801 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5802
5803 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5804 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5805 @cindex section alignment
5806 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5807 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5808 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5809 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5810 value in that section.
5811 @smallexample
5812 @group
5813 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5814 .output @{
5815 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5816 @dots{}
5817 @}
5818 @dots{} @}
5819 @end group
5820 @end smallexample
5821
5822 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5823 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5824 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5825 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5826 section.
5827
5828 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5829 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5830 This is equivalent to either
5831 @smallexample
5832 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5833 @end smallexample
5834 or
5835 @smallexample
5836 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5837 @end smallexample
5838 @noindent
5839 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5840 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5841 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5842 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5843 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5844 bytes in the on-disk file.
5845
5846 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5847 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5848 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5849 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5850 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5851
5852 @noindent
5853 Example:
5854 @smallexample
5855 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5856 @end smallexample
5857
5858 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5859 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5860 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5861 evaluation purposes.
5862
5863 @smallexample
5864 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5865 @end smallexample
5866
5867 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5868 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5869 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5870 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5871 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5872 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5873 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5874 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5875 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5876 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5877
5878 @smallexample
5879 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5880 @end smallexample
5881
5882 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5883 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5884 @cindex symbol defaults
5885 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5886 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5887 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5888 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5889 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5890 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5891 existed, its value is preserved:
5892
5893 @smallexample
5894 @group
5895 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5896 .text : @{
5897 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5898 @dots{}
5899 @}
5900 @dots{}
5901 @}
5902 @end group
5903 @end smallexample
5904
5905 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5906 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5907 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5908
5909 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5910 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5911 @cindex section load address in expression
5912 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5913 Section LMA}).
5914
5915 @kindex MAX
5916 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5917 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5918
5919 @kindex MIN
5920 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5921 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5922
5923 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5924 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5925 @cindex unallocated address, next
5926 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5927 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5928 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5929 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5930
5931 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5932 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5933 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5934
5935 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5936 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5937 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5938 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5939 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5940 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5941 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5942 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5943 name.
5944
5945 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5946 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5947 @cindex section size
5948 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5949 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5950 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5951 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5952 @smallexample
5953 @group
5954 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5955 .output @{
5956 .start = . ;
5957 @dots{}
5958 .end = . ;
5959 @}
5960 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5961 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5962 @dots{} @}
5963 @end group
5964 @end smallexample
5965
5966 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5967 @itemx sizeof_headers
5968 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5969 @cindex header size
5970 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5971 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5972 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5973 choose, to facilitate paging.
5974
5975 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5976 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5977 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5978 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5979 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5980 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5981 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5982 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5983 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5984 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5985 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5986 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5987 @end table
5988
5989 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5990 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5991 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5992 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5993 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5994 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5995 linker will report an error.
5996
5997 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5998
5999 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6000 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6001 commands.
6002
6003 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6004 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6005 read. This can affect archive searching.
6006
6007 @ifset GENERIC
6008 @node Machine Dependent
6009 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6010
6011 @cindex machine dependencies
6012 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6013 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6014 functionality are not listed.
6015
6016 @menu
6017 @ifset H8300
6018 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6019 @end ifset
6020 @ifset I960
6021 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6022 @end ifset
6023 @ifset M68HC11
6024 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6025 @end ifset
6026 @ifset ARM
6027 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6028 @end ifset
6029 @ifset HPPA
6030 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6031 @end ifset
6032 @ifset M68K
6033 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6034 @end ifset
6035 @ifset MMIX
6036 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6037 @end ifset
6038 @ifset MSP430
6039 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6040 @end ifset
6041 @ifset POWERPC
6042 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6043 @end ifset
6044 @ifset POWERPC64
6045 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6046 @end ifset
6047 @ifset SPU
6048 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6049 @end ifset
6050 @ifset TICOFF
6051 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6052 @end ifset
6053 @ifset WIN32
6054 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6055 @end ifset
6056 @ifset XTENSA
6057 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6058 @end ifset
6059 @end menu
6060 @end ifset
6061
6062 @ifset H8300
6063 @ifclear GENERIC
6064 @raisesections
6065 @end ifclear
6066
6067 @node H8/300
6068 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6069
6070 @cindex H8/300 support
6071 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6072 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6073
6074 @table @emph
6075 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6076 @item relaxing address modes
6077 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6078 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6079 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6080 respectively.
6081
6082 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6083 @item synthesizing instructions
6084 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
6085 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6086 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6087 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6088 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6089 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6090 top page of memory).
6091
6092 @item bit manipulation instructions
6093 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6094 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6095 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6096 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6097 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6098 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6099 the top page of memory).
6100
6101 @item system control instructions
6102 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6103 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6104 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6105 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6106 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6107 the top page of memory).
6108 @end table
6109
6110 @ifclear GENERIC
6111 @lowersections
6112 @end ifclear
6113 @end ifset
6114
6115 @ifclear GENERIC
6116 @ifset Renesas
6117 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6118 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6119 @node Renesas
6120 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6121
6122 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6123 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6124 options are required for these chips.
6125 @end ifset
6126 @end ifclear
6127
6128 @ifset I960
6129 @ifclear GENERIC
6130 @raisesections
6131 @end ifclear
6132
6133 @node i960
6134 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6135
6136 @cindex i960 support
6137
6138 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6139 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6140 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6141 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6142 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6143 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6144 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6145
6146 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6147 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6148 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6149 the names
6150
6151 @smallexample
6152 @group
6153 try
6154 libtry.a
6155 tryca
6156 libtryca.a
6157 @end group
6158 @end smallexample
6159
6160 @noindent
6161 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6162 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6163
6164 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6165 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6166 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6167 specifies a library.
6168
6169 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6170 @cindex relaxing on i960
6171 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6172 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6173 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6174 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6175 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6176 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6177 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6178 not itself call any subroutines).
6179
6180 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6181 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6182 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6183 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6184
6185 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6186
6187 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6188 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6189 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6190
6191 @ifclear GENERIC
6192 @lowersections
6193 @end ifclear
6194 @end ifset
6195
6196 @ifset ARM
6197 @ifclear GENERIC
6198 @raisesections
6199 @end ifclear
6200
6201 @ifset M68HC11
6202 @ifclear GENERIC
6203 @raisesections
6204 @end ifclear
6205
6206 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6207 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6208
6209 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6210
6211 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6212
6213 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6214 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6215
6216 @table @emph
6217 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6218 @item relaxing address modes
6219 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6220 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6221 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6222 respectively.
6223
6224 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6225 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6226 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6227
6228 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6229 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6230 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6231 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6232 @code{bset} instructions.
6233
6234 @end table
6235
6236 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6237
6238 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6239 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6240 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6241 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6242 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6243 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6244 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6245 point to the function trampoline.
6246
6247 @ifclear GENERIC
6248 @lowersections
6249 @end ifclear
6250 @end ifset
6251
6252 @node ARM
6253 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6254
6255 @cindex ARM interworking support
6256 @kindex --support-old-code
6257 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6258 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6259 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6260 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6261 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6262 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6263 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6264 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6265 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6266 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6267
6268 @cindex thumb entry point
6269 @cindex entry point, thumb
6270 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6271 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6272 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6273 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6274 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6275 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6276
6277 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6278 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6279 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6280 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6281 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6282 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6283
6284 @cindex BE8
6285 @kindex --be8
6286 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6287 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6288 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6289
6290 @cindex TARGET1
6291 @kindex --target1-rel
6292 @kindex --target1-abs
6293 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6294 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6295 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6296 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6297
6298 @cindex TARGET2
6299 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6300 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6301 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6302 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6303 @table @samp
6304 @item rel
6305 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6306 @item abs
6307 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6308 @item got-rel
6309 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6310 @end table
6311
6312 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6313 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6314 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6315 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6316 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6317 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6318
6319 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6320 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6321 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6322
6323 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6324 relocations are ignored.
6325
6326 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6327 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6328 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6329 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6330
6331 @smallexample
6332 TST rM, #1
6333 MOVEQ PC, rM
6334 BX Rn
6335 @end smallexample
6336
6337 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6338 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6339 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6340
6341 @cindex USE_BLX
6342 @kindex --use-blx
6343 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6344 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6345 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6346 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6347 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6348
6349 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6350 specify it if you are using that target.
6351
6352 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6353 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6354 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6355 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6356 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6357 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6358 the support code can read the intended values.
6359
6360 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6361 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6362 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6363 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6364 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6365 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6366
6367 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6368 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6369 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6370 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6371 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6372 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6373
6374 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6375 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6376 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6377 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6378 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6379 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6380 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6381
6382 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6383 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6384 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6385 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6386 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6387 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6388 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6389
6390 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6391 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6392 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6393
6394 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6395 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6396 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6397 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6398 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6399 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6400 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6401 not be diagnosed.
6402
6403 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6404 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6405 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6406 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6407 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6408 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6409 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6410
6411 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6412 @kindex --pic-veneer
6413 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6414 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6415 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6416 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6417
6418 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6419 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6420 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6421 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6422 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6423 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6424 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6425 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6426 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6427 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6428 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6429 where they should be placed.
6430
6431 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6432 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6433 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6434 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6435 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6436 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6437 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6438 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6439 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6440 from the input sections.
6441
6442 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6443 @samp{N = +1}.
6444
6445 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6446 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6447 otherwise.
6448
6449 @ifclear GENERIC
6450 @lowersections
6451 @end ifclear
6452 @end ifset
6453
6454 @ifset HPPA
6455 @ifclear GENERIC
6456 @raisesections
6457 @end ifclear
6458
6459 @node HPPA ELF32
6460 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6461 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6462 @kindex --multi-subspace
6463 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6464 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6465 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6466 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6467 multiple sub-spaces.
6468
6469 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6470 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6471 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6472 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6473 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6474 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6475 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6476 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6477 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6478 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6479 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6480 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6481 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6482 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6483 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6484 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6485
6486 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6487 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6488 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6489 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6490
6491 @ifclear GENERIC
6492 @lowersections
6493 @end ifclear
6494 @end ifset
6495
6496 @ifset M68K
6497 @ifclear GENERIC
6498 @raisesections
6499 @end ifclear
6500
6501 @node M68K
6502 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6503
6504 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6505 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6506 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6507 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6508 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6509 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6510 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6511 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6512 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6513 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6514 support such GOTs.
6515 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6516 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6517 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6518 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6519
6520 @ifclear GENERIC
6521 @lowersections
6522 @end ifclear
6523 @end ifset
6524
6525 @ifset MMIX
6526 @ifclear GENERIC
6527 @raisesections
6528 @end ifclear
6529
6530 @node MMIX
6531 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6532 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6533 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6534 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6535 can translate between the two formats.
6536
6537 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6538 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6539 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6540 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6541 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6542 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6543 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6544 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6545
6546 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6547 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6548 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6549 of a section.
6550
6551 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6552 are left out from an mmo file.
6553
6554 @ifclear GENERIC
6555 @lowersections
6556 @end ifclear
6557 @end ifset
6558
6559 @ifset MSP430
6560 @ifclear GENERIC
6561 @raisesections
6562 @end ifclear
6563
6564 @node MSP430
6565 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6566 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6567 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6568 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6569
6570 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6571 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6572
6573 @table @code
6574 @item @samp{.vectors}
6575 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6576
6577 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6578 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6579 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6580
6581 @item @samp{.infomem}
6582 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6583 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6584
6585 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6586 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6587 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6588
6589 @item @samp{.noinit}
6590 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6591
6592 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6593 @end table
6594
6595 @ifclear GENERIC
6596 @lowersections
6597 @end ifclear
6598 @end ifset
6599
6600 @ifset POWERPC
6601 @ifclear GENERIC
6602 @raisesections
6603 @end ifclear
6604
6605 @node PowerPC ELF32
6606 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6607 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6608 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6609 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6610 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6611 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6612 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6613 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6614 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6615 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6616 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6617 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6618 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6619
6620 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6621 @table @option
6622 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6623 @kindex --bss-plt
6624 @item --bss-plt
6625 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6626 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6627 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6628 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6629 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6630 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6631 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6632 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6633
6634 @kindex --secure-plt
6635 @item --secure-plt
6636 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6637 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6638 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6639 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6640 style BSS PLT.
6641
6642 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6643 @kindex --sdata-got
6644 @item --sdata-got
6645 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6646 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6647 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6648 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6649 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6650 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6651 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6652 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6653 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6654 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6655 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6656 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6657
6658 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6659 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6660 @item --emit-stub-syms
6661 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6662 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6663
6664 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6665 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6666 @item --no-tls-optimize
6667 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6668 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6669 disable the optimization.
6670 @end table
6671
6672 @ifclear GENERIC
6673 @lowersections
6674 @end ifclear
6675 @end ifset
6676
6677 @ifset POWERPC64
6678 @ifclear GENERIC
6679 @raisesections
6680 @end ifclear
6681
6682 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6683 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6684
6685 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6686 @table @option
6687 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6688 @kindex --stub-group-size
6689 @item --stub-group-size
6690 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6691 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6692 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6693 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6694 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6695 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6696 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6697 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6698 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6699 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6700 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6701 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6702 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6703 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6704
6705 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6706 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6707 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6708 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6709
6710 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6711 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6712 @item --emit-stub-syms
6713 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6714 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6715
6716 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6717 @kindex --dotsyms
6718 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6719 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6720 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6721 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6722 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6723 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6724 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6725 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6726 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6727 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6728 feature.
6729
6730 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6731 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6732 @item --no-tls-optimize
6733 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6734 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6735 disable the optimization.
6736
6737 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6738 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6739 @item --no-opd-optimize
6740 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6741 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6742 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6743 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6744
6745 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6746 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6747 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6748 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6749 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6750 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6751 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6752
6753 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6754 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6755 @item --no-toc-optimize
6756 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6757 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6758 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6759 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6760 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6761 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6762 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6763 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6764 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6765 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6766 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6767 optimization.
6768
6769 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6770 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6771 @item --no-multi-toc
6772 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6773 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6774 where TOC
6775 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6776 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6777 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6778 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6779 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6780 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6781 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6782 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6783
6784 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6785 @kindex --no-toc-sort
6786 @item --no-toc-sort
6787 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6788 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6789 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6790 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6791 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6792 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6793 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6794 off this feature.
6795
6796 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6797 @kindex --plt-align
6798 @kindex --no-plt-align
6799 @item --plt-align
6800 @itemx --no-plt-align
6801 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6802 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6803 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6804 are packed tightly.
6805
6806 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6807 @kindex --plt-static-chain
6808 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6809 @item --plt-static-chain
6810 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6811 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6812 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6813 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6814
6815 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6816 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
6817 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6818 @item --plt-thread-safe
6819 @itemx --no-thread-safe
6820 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6821 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6822 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6823 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6824 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6825 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6826 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6827 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6828 default behaviour.
6829 @end table
6830
6831 @ifclear GENERIC
6832 @lowersections
6833 @end ifclear
6834 @end ifset
6835
6836 @ifset SPU
6837 @ifclear GENERIC
6838 @raisesections
6839 @end ifclear
6840
6841 @node SPU ELF
6842 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6843
6844 @cindex SPU ELF options
6845 @table @option
6846
6847 @cindex SPU plugins
6848 @kindex --plugin
6849 @item --plugin
6850 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6851
6852 @cindex SPU overlays
6853 @kindex --no-overlays
6854 @item --no-overlays
6855 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6856 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6857 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6858 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6859
6860 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6861 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6862 @item --emit-stub-syms
6863 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6864 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6865
6866 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6867 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6868 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6869 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6870 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6871 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6872
6873 @cindex SPU local store size
6874 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6875 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6876 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6877 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6878 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6879
6880 @cindex SPU
6881 @kindex --stack-analysis
6882 @item --stack-analysis
6883 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6884 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6885 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6886 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6887 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6888 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6889 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6890 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6891 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6892 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6893 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6894 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6895 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6896 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6897 and calls will be given.
6898
6899 @cindex SPU
6900 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6901 @item --emit-stack-syms
6902 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6903 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6904 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6905 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6906 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6907 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6908 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6909 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6910 @end table
6911
6912 @ifclear GENERIC
6913 @lowersections
6914 @end ifclear
6915 @end ifset
6916
6917 @ifset TICOFF
6918 @ifclear GENERIC
6919 @raisesections
6920 @end ifclear
6921
6922 @node TI COFF
6923 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6924 @cindex TI COFF versions
6925 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6926 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6927 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6928 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6929 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6930 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6931
6932 @ifclear GENERIC
6933 @lowersections
6934 @end ifclear
6935 @end ifset
6936
6937 @ifset WIN32
6938 @ifclear GENERIC
6939 @raisesections
6940 @end ifclear
6941
6942 @node WIN32
6943 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6944
6945 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6946 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6947 command line options mentioned here.
6948
6949 @table @emph
6950 @cindex import libraries
6951 @item import libraries
6952 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6953 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6954 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6955 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6956 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6957 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6958
6959 @item exporting DLL symbols
6960 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6961 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6962
6963 @table @emph
6964 @item using auto-export functionality
6965 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6966 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6967 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6968
6969 @itemize
6970 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6971 @item --exclude-symbols
6972 @item --exclude-libs
6973 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6974 @item --version-script
6975 @end itemize
6976
6977 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6978 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6979 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6980 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6981 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6982 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6983 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6984 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6985
6986 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6987 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6988 if either of the following are true:
6989
6990 @itemize
6991 @item A DEF file is used.
6992 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6993 @end itemize
6994
6995 @item using a DEF file
6996 @cindex using a DEF file
6997 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6998 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6999 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7000 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7001 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7002
7003 @example
7004 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7005 @end example
7006
7007 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7008 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7009
7010 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7011
7012 @example
7013 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7014
7015 EXPORTS
7016 foo
7017 bar
7018 _bar = bar
7019 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7020 var1 DATA
7021 doo = foo == foo2
7022 eoo DATA == var1
7023 @end example
7024
7025 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7026 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7027 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7028 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7029 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7030 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7031 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7032 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7033 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7034
7035 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7036 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7037 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7038
7039 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7040 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7041 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7042 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7043
7044 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7045 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7046 non-default base address for the image.
7047
7048 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7049 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7050 filename specified on the command line.
7051
7052 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7053
7054 @example
7055 EXPORTS
7056 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7057 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7058 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7059 @end example
7060
7061 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7062 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7063 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7064 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7065 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7066 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7067 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7068
7069 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7070
7071 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7072 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7073 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7074 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7075 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7076
7077 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7078 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7079 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7080 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7081
7082 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7083 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7084 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7085 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7086 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7087 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7088 application will behave unexpectedly.
7089
7090 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7091 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7092 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7093 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7094 the DLL without an import library.
7095
7096 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7097 other DEF file statements
7098
7099 @cindex creating a DEF file
7100 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7101 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7102
7103 @item Using decorations
7104 @cindex Using decorations
7105 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7106 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7107 declared as:
7108
7109 @example
7110 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7111 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7112 @end example
7113
7114 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7115 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7116 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7117 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7118
7119 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7120 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7121 instead:
7122
7123 @example
7124 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7125 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7126 @end example
7127
7128 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7129 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7130 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7131 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7132 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7133 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7134 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7135 information.
7136 @end table
7137
7138 @cindex automatic data imports
7139 @item automatic data imports
7140 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7141 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7142 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7143 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7144 code to these platforms, especially for large
7145 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7146 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7147 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7148 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7149 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7150 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7151 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7152 trigger the feature's use.
7153
7154 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7155 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7156
7157 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7158 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7159
7160 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7161 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7162 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7163 below.
7164
7165 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7166 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7167 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7168 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7169 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7170 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7171 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7172 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7173 references.
7174
7175 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7176 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7177 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7178 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7179 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7180 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7181 run without error on an older system.
7182
7183 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7184 enabled as needed.
7185
7186 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7187 @item direct linking to a dll
7188 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7189 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7190 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7191 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7192 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7193 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7194 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7195 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7196 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7197 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7198
7199 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7200 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7201 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7202 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7203 select the dll instead of an import library.
7204
7205
7206 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7207 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7208
7209 @example
7210 libxxx.dll.a
7211 xxx.dll.a
7212 libxxx.a
7213 xxx.lib
7214 cygxxx.dll (*)
7215 libxxx.dll
7216 xxx.dll
7217 @end example
7218
7219 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7220
7221 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7222 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7223 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7224 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7225 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7226
7227 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7228 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7229 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7230 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7231 could coexist on the same machine.
7232
7233 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7234 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7235 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7236
7237 @example
7238 bin/
7239 cygxxx.dll
7240 lib/
7241 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7242 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7243 @end example
7244
7245 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7246 done two ways:
7247
7248 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7249 @example
7250 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7251 @end example
7252
7253 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7254 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7255 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7256 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7257
7258 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7259 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7260 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7261 making the app/dll.
7262
7263 @example
7264 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7265 @end example
7266
7267 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7268
7269 @example
7270 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7271 @end example
7272
7273 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7274 perfectly legal
7275
7276 @example
7277 bin/
7278 cygxxx-5.dll
7279 lib/
7280 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7281 @end example
7282
7283 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7284 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7285 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7286
7287 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7288 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7289
7290 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7291 work with auto-imported data.
7292
7293 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7294 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7295 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7296 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7297 possible to do this without an import lib.
7298
7299 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7300 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7301 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7302 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7303
7304 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7305 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7306 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7307 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7308 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7309 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7310 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7311
7312 @item symbol aliasing
7313 @table @emph
7314 @item adding additional names
7315 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7316 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7317 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7318 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7319 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7320
7321 @example
7322 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7323
7324 EXPORTS
7325 foo
7326 _foo = foo
7327 @end example
7328
7329 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7330
7331 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7332 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7333
7334 @example
7335 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7336 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7337 @end example
7338
7339 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7340 symbols.
7341
7342 @item renaming symbols
7343 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7344 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7345 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7346 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7347 created). In the following example:
7348
7349 @example
7350 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7351
7352 EXPORTS
7353 _foo = foo
7354 @end example
7355
7356 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7357 @samp{_foo}.
7358 @end table
7359
7360 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7361 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7362 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7363 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7364 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7365 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7366 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7367 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7368 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7369 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7370 which is probably not what you wanted.
7371
7372 @cindex weak externals
7373 @item weak externals
7374 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7375 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7376 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7377 are three variants of weak externals:
7378 @itemize
7379 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7380 called lazy externals.
7381 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7382 This form is not presently implemented.
7383 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7384 implemented.
7385 @end itemize
7386 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7387 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7388 uses a default value.
7389
7390 @cindex aligned common symbols
7391 @item aligned common symbols
7392 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7393 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7394 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7395 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7396 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7397 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7398 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7399 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7400 @end table
7401
7402 @ifclear GENERIC
7403 @lowersections
7404 @end ifclear
7405 @end ifset
7406
7407 @ifset XTENSA
7408 @ifclear GENERIC
7409 @raisesections
7410 @end ifclear
7411
7412 @node Xtensa
7413 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7414
7415 @cindex Xtensa processors
7416 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7417 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7418 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7419 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7420 example, with the command:
7421
7422 @smallexample
7423 SECTIONS
7424 @{
7425 .text : @{
7426 *(.literal .text)
7427 @}
7428 @}
7429 @end smallexample
7430
7431 @noindent
7432 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7433 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7434 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7435 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7436 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7437 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7438 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7439
7440 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7441 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7442 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7443 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7444 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7445 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7446 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7447 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7448 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7449 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7450 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7451 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7452
7453 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7454 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7455 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7456 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7457 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7458 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7459 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7460 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7461 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7462 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7463 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7464 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7465 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7466 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7467
7468 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7469 control the linker:
7470
7471 @cindex Xtensa options
7472 @table @option
7473 @item --size-opt
7474 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7475 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7476 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7477 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7478 preserve the correctness of the code.
7479 @end table
7480
7481 @ifclear GENERIC
7482 @lowersections
7483 @end ifclear
7484 @end ifset
7485
7486 @ifclear SingleFormat
7487 @node BFD
7488 @chapter BFD
7489
7490 @cindex back end
7491 @cindex object file management
7492 @cindex object formats available
7493 @kindex objdump -i
7494 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7495 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7496 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7497 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7498 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7499 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7500 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7501 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7502 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7503
7504 @cindex BFD requirements
7505 @cindex requirements for BFD
7506 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7507 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7508 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7509 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7510 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7511 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7512 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7513
7514 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7515 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7516 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7517 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7518
7519 @menu
7520 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7521 @end menu
7522
7523 @node BFD outline
7524 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7525 @cindex opening object files
7526 @include bfdsumm.texi
7527 @end ifclear
7528
7529 @node Reporting Bugs
7530 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7531 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7532 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7533
7534 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7535
7536 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7537 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7538 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7539 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7540 @command{ld}.
7541
7542 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7543 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7544
7545 @menu
7546 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7547 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7548 @end menu
7549
7550 @node Bug Criteria
7551 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7552 @cindex bug criteria
7553
7554 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7555
7556 @itemize @bullet
7557 @cindex fatal signal
7558 @cindex linker crash
7559 @cindex crash of linker
7560 @item
7561 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7562 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7563
7564 @cindex error on valid input
7565 @item
7566 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7567
7568 @cindex invalid input
7569 @item
7570 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7571 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7572 object files are correct.
7573
7574 @item
7575 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7576 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7577 @end itemize
7578
7579 @node Bug Reporting
7580 @section How to Report Bugs
7581 @cindex bug reports
7582 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7583
7584 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7585 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7586 recommend you contact that organization first.
7587
7588 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7589 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7590 distribution.
7591
7592 @ifset BUGURL
7593 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7594 @value{BUGURL}.
7595 @end ifset
7596
7597 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7598 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7599 fact or leave it out, state it!
7600
7601 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7602 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7603 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7604 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7605 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7606 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7607 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7608 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7609 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7610 and the most helpful.
7611
7612 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7613 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7614 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7615
7616 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7617 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7618 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7619 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7620
7621 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7622
7623 @itemize @bullet
7624 @item
7625 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7626 the @samp{--version} argument.
7627
7628 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7629 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7630
7631 @item
7632 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7633 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7634
7635 @item
7636 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7637 version number.
7638
7639 @item
7640 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7641 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7642
7643 @item
7644 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7645 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7646 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7647 sufficient.
7648
7649 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7650 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7651
7652 @item
7653 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7654 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7655 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7656 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7657 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7658 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7659 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7660 attachments are best.
7661
7662 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7663 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7664 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7665 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7666 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7667
7668 @item
7669 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7670 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7671
7672 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7673 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7674 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7675 a chance to make a mistake.
7676
7677 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7678 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7679 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7680 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7681 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7682 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7683 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7684 any conclusion from our observations.
7685
7686 @item
7687 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7688 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7689 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7690 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7691 context, not by line number.
7692
7693 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7694 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7695 @end itemize
7696
7697 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7698
7699 @itemize @bullet
7700 @item
7701 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7702
7703 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7704 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7705 changes will not affect it.
7706
7707 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7708 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7709 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7710 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7711
7712 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7713 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7714 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7715 less time, and so on.
7716
7717 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7718 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7719
7720 @item
7721 A patch for the bug.
7722
7723 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7724 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7725 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7726 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7727
7728 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7729 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7730 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7731 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7732 fixed.
7733
7734 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7735 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7736 help us to understand.
7737
7738 @item
7739 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7740
7741 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7742 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7743 @end itemize
7744
7745 @node MRI
7746 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7747 @cindex MRI compatibility
7748 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7749 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7750 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7751 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7752 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7753 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7754 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7755
7756 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7757 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7758 features to make use of them.
7759
7760 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7761 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7762
7763 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7764 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7765 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7766 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7767 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7768
7769 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7770
7771 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7772 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7773 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7774
7775 @table @code
7776 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7777 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7778 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7779 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7780 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7781 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7782 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7783 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7784 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7785 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7786 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7787
7788 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7789 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7790 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7791 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7792
7793 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7794
7795 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7796 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7797 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7798 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7799
7800 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7801 @item BASE @var{expression}
7802 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7803 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7804
7805 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7806 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7807 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7808 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7809
7810 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7811 @item END
7812 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7813
7814 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7815 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7816 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7817 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7818
7819 @enumerate
7820 @item
7821 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7822
7823 @item
7824 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7825
7826 @item
7827 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7828 @samp{COFF}
7829 @end enumerate
7830
7831 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7832 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7833 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7834 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7835
7836 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7837 same line, with no change in its effect.
7838
7839 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7840 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7841 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7842 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7843 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7844 command line.
7845
7846 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7847 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7848 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7849 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7850 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7851
7852 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7853 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7854 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7855 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7856 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7857 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7858 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7859 file, in the order specified.
7860
7861 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7862 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7863 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7864 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7865 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7866 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7867
7868 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7869 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7870 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7871 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7872 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7873 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7874 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7875 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7876 @end table
7877
7878 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7879 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7880 @include fdl.texi
7881
7882 @node LD Index
7883 @unnumbered LD Index
7884
7885 @printindex cp
7886
7887 @tex
7888 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7889 % meantime:
7890 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7891 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7892 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7893 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7894 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7895 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7896 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7897 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7898 \page\colophon
7899 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7900 @end tex
7901
7902 @bye
This page took 0.180288 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.